summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
commite0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch)
tree60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples')
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-biber.pdfbin0 -> 167963 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 167963 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction.tex170
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-biber.pdfbin0 -> 208489 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 210442 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations.tex18
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-biber.pdfbin0 -> 245369 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 245955 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys.tex710
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-biber.pdfbin0 -> 80153 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 80153 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters.tex68
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-biber.pdfbin0 -> 81703 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 81703 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section.tex64
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-biber.pdfbin0 -> 98391 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 98391 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section.tex68
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-biber.pdfbin0 -> 98436 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 98436 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex49
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-biber.pdfbin0 -> 175128 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 175128 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex44
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-biber.pdfbin0 -> 174633 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 174633 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category.tex46
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-biber.pdfbin0 -> 119269 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 119269 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type.tex26
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-biber.pdfbin0 -> 157676 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 157853 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.tex53
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.tex58
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-biber.pdfbin0 -> 157653 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 157872 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.tex40
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.tex45
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-biber.pdfbin0 -> 112914 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 112914 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex87
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-biber.pdfbin0 -> 158305 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 158535 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.tex44
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.tex47
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-biber.pdfbin0 -> 170448 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 171177 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single.tex75
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-biber.pdfbin0 -> 171696 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 172421 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple.tex151
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-biber.pdfbin0 -> 88909 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 88909 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry.tex103
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-biber.pdfbin0 -> 177233 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 178088 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric.tex98
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-biber.pdfbin0 -> 179209 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 180379 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex68
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-biber.pdfbin0 -> 181606 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 182517 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex51
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-biber.pdfbin0 -> 200027 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 200711 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex78
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-biber.pdfbin0 -> 111944 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 111944 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.tex29
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-biber.pdfbin0 -> 101001 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 101001 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.tex29
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-biber.pdfbin0 -> 280076 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 278971 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex224
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-biber.pdfbin0 -> 213639 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 213639 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex208
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-biber.pdfbin0 -> 147302 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 147302 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex146
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-biber.pdfbin0 -> 225919 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 225919 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex203
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-biber.pdfbin0 -> 277780 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 276658 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex125
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-biber.pdfbin0 -> 203054 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 203054 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex106
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-biber.pdfbin0 -> 126041 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 126041 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.tex43
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-biber.pdfbin0 -> 222703 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 222703 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex97
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-biber.pdfbin0 -> 195321 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 195321 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex89
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-biber.pdfbin0 -> 143172 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 143172 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex49
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-biber.pdfbin0 -> 147774 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 147774 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex95
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-biber.pdfbin0 -> 268064 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 266544 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose.tex153
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-biber.pdfbin0 -> 272070 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 270651 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex217
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-biber.pdfbin0 -> 270378 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 268926 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex169
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-biber.pdfbin0 -> 274169 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 272789 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex240
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-biber.pdfbin0 -> 328754 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 327368 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex401
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-biber.pdfbin0 -> 273584 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 272202 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.tex293
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-biber.pdfbin0 -> 270809 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 269428 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.tex242
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-biber.pdfbin0 -> 244283 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 244283 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading.tex77
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-biber.pdfbin0 -> 149729 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 149729 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft.tex32
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-biber.pdfbin0 -> 150176 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-bibtex.pdfbin0 -> 148857 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug.tex35
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries-biber.pdfbin0 -> 31285 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries.tex12
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes-biber.pdfbin0 -> 21547 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes.tex18
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists-biber.pdfbin0 -> 61940 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists.tex45
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts-biber.pdfbin0 -> 37878 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.dbx1
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.tex439
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix-biber.pdfbin0 -> 23855 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix.tex85
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists-biber.pdfbin0 -> 12144 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.bib23
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.dbx3
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.tex93
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates-biber.pdfbin0 -> 25112 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates.tex198
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations-biber.pdfbin0 -> 16371 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.bib12
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.tex53
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bib1667
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bltxml2840
157 files changed, 11052 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..009d4bb3ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..75171ed490
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b08ae56124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/01-introduction.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+%
+% This file briefly presents the main citation commands. It also
+% illustrates the typical structure of a document based on biblatex.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+%
+% We load the babel package and specify the main language of the
+% document. If babel is detected, biblatex will automatically adjust
+% to the default language of the document.
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+%
+% We load the csquotes package, which is required for
+% language-specific quotation marks. See the csquotes manual for
+% further information about this package.
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+%
+% We are using the 'authoryear' style in this example.
+% The default is the 'numerical' style.
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+%
+% We use the database biblatex-examples.bib.
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+%
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Standard citation commands}
+
+\subsection*{The \cmd{cite} command}
+
+% The \cite command prints a bare citation without parentheses.
+
+\cite{companion}
+
+\cite[59]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][59--63]{companion}
+
+\subsection*{The \cmd{parencite} command}
+
+% The \parencite command, which is intended for in-text citations,
+% encloses the citation in parentheses. Note that the 'numeric' and
+% 'alphabetic' styles use square brackets instead.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][59--63]{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{The \cmd{footcite} command}
+
+% The \footcite command is similar to \parencite, except that the
+% citation is given in a footnote.
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59]{companion}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][]{companion}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][59--63]{companion}
+
+\subsection*{The \cmd{textcite} command}
+
+% The \textcite command is intended for citations integrated in the
+% flow of text, replacing the subject of the sentence.
+
+\textcite{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+% With \textcite, the first optional argument is of limited use
+% only, since you could simply place the prenote in front of the
+% citation. It is still supported for the sake of consistency.
+
+\textcite[see][]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][59--63]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\section*{Style-independent commands}
+
+\subsection*{The \cmd{autocite} command}
+
+% The point of the \autocite command is that it automatically adapts
+% to the predominant citation format (inline or footnote) normally
+% used with the selected citation style. It should be used at the
+% end of the sentence and usually works like \parencite or
+% \footcite, depending on the citation style and the setting of the
+% 'autocite' package option. With the author-year style used in this
+% example, it works like \parencite:
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
+
+\section*{Text commands}
+
+% There are a few predefined commands for bibliographic data which
+% is frequently used in the flow of text. Note that biblatex also
+% grants access to all lists and fields at a lower level, see below.
+
+\citeauthor{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+% Note that \citetitle will use the 'shorttitle' field, if
+% available.
+
+See the \citetitle{companion} for more filler text.
+
+% \citetitle*, on the other hand, always prints the 'title'
+% field.
+
+See also: \citetitle*{companion}. It has more filler text.
+
+\citetitle*{companion} by \citeauthor{companion} was
+published in \citeyear{companion}.
+
+\section*{Special commands}
+
+% The \nocite command adds an entry to the bibliography without
+% printing any citation. If the argument is an asterisk (i.e.,
+% '\nocite{*}'), all entries found in the bib file are added to the
+% bibliography.
+
+No citation here.\nocite{knuth:ct}
+
+% The \fullcite command prints a verbose citation similar to the
+% full bibliography entry.
+
+\fullcite{companion}
+
+% \footfullcite is similar to \fullcite, except that the citation is
+% put in a footnote.
+
+This is just filler text.\footfullcite{companion}
+
+\section*{Low-level commands}
+
+% The commands in this section grant low-level access to all
+% bibliographic data. See the biblatex manual for details about the
+% different data types (name lists, literal lists, fields).
+
+% The \citename command prints a name list. For example, the
+% \citeauthor command shown above is similar to the following
+% low-level command:
+
+\citename{companion}{author}
+
+% The \citelist command is similar to \citename but prints literal
+% lists.
+
+\citelist{companion}{publisher}
+
+% The \citefield command prints fields. For example, the
+% \citetitle* command shown above is similar to the following
+% low-level command (except for the formatting):
+
+\citefield{companion}{title}
+
+% The list of references is printed by way of \printbibliography.
+
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d5b086d24a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d8f86f3565
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..21975d90f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/02-annotations.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+%
+% The example entries in examples.bib feature 'annotation' fields
+% with some remarks about the respective entry. The sole purpose of
+% this file is to print an annotated bibliography which includes
+% these fields.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=reading,abstract=false,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\begin{document}
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e478c9368c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1fa3dfb031
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1bfe7767d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/03-localization-keys.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,710 @@
+%
+% This file presents default localization keys for the module specified by
+% the main document language passed to 'babel'.
+%
+\documentclass{article}
+
+% localization modules
+% - ascii
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+%\usepackage[brazilian]{babel}
+%\usepackage[catalan]{babel}
+%\usepackage[croatian]{babel}
+%\usepackage[czech]{babel}
+%\usepackage[danish]{babel}
+%\usepackage[dutch]{babel}
+\usepackage[english]{babel}
+%\usepackage[estonian]{babel}
+%\usepackage[finnish]{babel}
+%\usepackage[french]{babel}
+%\usepackage[galician]{babel}
+%\usepackage[german]{babel}
+%\usepackage[icelandic]{babel}
+%\usepackage[italian]{babel}
+%\usepackage[latvian]{babel}
+%\usepackage[magyar]{babel}
+%\usepackage[norsk]{babel}
+%\usepackage[nynorsk]{babel}
+%\usepackage[polish]{babel}
+%\usepackage[portuguese]{babel}
+%\usepackage[slovak]{babel}
+%\usepackage[slovene]{babel}
+%\usepackage[spanish]{babel}
+%\usepackage[swedish]{babel}
+% - UTF-8
+% -- Russian
+%\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc}
+%\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+%\usepackage[bulgarian]{babel}
+%\usepackage[russian]{babel}
+%\usepackage[ukrainian]{babel}
+% -- Greek
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+%\usepackage[utf8]{inputenx}
+%\usepackage[english,greek]{babel}
+
+\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes}
+\DeclareQuoteAlias{spanish}{catalan}
+\DeclareQuoteAlias{croatian}{polish}
+\DeclareQuoteAlias{croatian}{slovene}
+\usepackage[backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+
+% list format
+\newcommand*{\ie}{i.\,e.}
+\newcommand*{\eg}{e.\,g.}
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\vrb{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newcommand{\vrb}[1]{\mbox{\ttfamily #1}}
+\newcommand{\acr}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\newrobustcmd*{\bibfield}[1]{\mbox{\ttfamily #1}}
+\newrobustcmd*{\bibtype}[1]{\mbox{\ttfamily @#1}}
+\newcommand{\prm}[1]{%
+ \mbox{%
+ \ensuremath\langle
+ \normalfont\textit{#1}%
+ \ensuremath\rangle}}
+\newenvironment*{keylist}
+ {\list{}{%
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{1.25in}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{10pt}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \raggedright%
+ \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss\bfseries##1}}}
+ {\endlist}
+\makeatletter
+\def\keyitem#1{%
+ \item[#1]
+ \begingroup
+ \keyitemhook%
+ \blx@bibinit%
+ \midsentence\ifbibstring{#1}{}{\latintext}\biblstring{#1}%
+ \expandafter\lbx@initnamehook\lsmartoftext%
+ \par\nobreak
+ \midsentence\ifbibstring{#1}{}{\latintext}\bibsstring{#1}%
+ \expandafter\lbx@initnamehook\ssmartoftext%
+ \endgroup
+ \par\nobreak}
+\makeatother
+\ifdefstring{\languagename}{greek}{%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \appto{\keyitemhook}{\greektext}%
+ \latintext}
+ \preto{\UrlFont}{\latintext}
+ \pretocmd{\printbibliography}{\greektext}{}{}}{}
+\AtBeginBibliography{\raggedright}
+\AtBeginDocument{\MakeAutoQuote*{<}{>}}
+
+% user-configurable commands
+\newcommand{\keyitemhook}{}
+\newcommand{\lsmartoftext}{A}
+\newcommand{\ssmartoftext}{B}
+
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\nocite{*}
+
+\begin{document}
+\section*{Localization Strings for \vrb{\languagename}}
+
+The localization keys listed in this document are defined by default. Each key is printed with its description from the \vrb{biblatex} manual and strings specified by \vrb{\languagename.lbx} in following format.
+\begin{verbatim}
+<key name> <long string>
+ <short string>
+\end{verbatim}
+Long and short strings ending with \cmd{smartof}-type commands are respectively given the arguments \cmd{lsmarttext} and \cmd{ssmarttext}, which can be redefined in this document's preamble. Any unspecified keys will appear in boldface and generate warnings in the \vrb{log} file. String definitions or corrections are welcome at:
+\begin{center}
+\url{http://github.com/plk/biblatex/issues}
+\end{center}
+
+\subsection*{Headings}
+
+The following strings are special because they are intended for use in headings and made available globally via macros. For this reason, they should be capitalized for use in headings and they must not include any local commands which are part of \vrb{biblatex}'s author interface.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{bibliography} The term <bibliography>, also available as \cmd{bibname}.
+\keyitem{references} The term <references>, also available as \cmd{refname}.
+\keyitem{shorthands} The term <list of shorthands> or <list of abbreviations>, also available as \cmd{biblistname}.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Roles, Expressed as Functions}
+
+The following keys refer to roles which are expressed as a function (<editor>, <translator>) rather than as an action (<edited by>, <translated by>).
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{editor} The term <editor>, referring to the main editor. This is the most generic editorial role.
+\keyitem{editors} The plural form of \texttt{editor}.
+\keyitem{compiler} The term <compiler>, referring to an editor whose task is to compile a work.
+\keyitem{compilers} The plural form of \texttt{compiler}.
+\keyitem{founder} The term <founder>, referring to a founding editor.
+\keyitem{founders} The plural form of \texttt{founder}.
+\keyitem{continuator} An expression like <continuator>, <continuation>, or <continued>, referring to a past editor who continued the work of the founding editor but was subsequently replaced by the current editor.
+\keyitem{continuators} The plural form of \texttt{continuator}.
+\keyitem{redactor} The term <redactor>, referring to a secondary editor.
+\keyitem{redactors} The plural form of \texttt{redactor}.
+\keyitem{reviser} The term <reviser>, referring to a secondary editor.
+\keyitem{revisers} The plural form of \texttt{reviser}.
+\keyitem{collaborator} A term like <collaborator>, <collaboration>, <cooperator>, or <cooperation>, referring to a secondary editor.
+\keyitem{collaborators} The plural form of \texttt{collaborator}.
+\keyitem{translator} The term <translator>.
+\keyitem{translators} The plural form of \texttt{translator}.
+\keyitem{commentator} The term <commentator>, referring to the author of a commentary to a work.
+\keyitem{commentators} The plural form of \texttt{commentators}.
+\keyitem{annotator} The term <annotator>, referring to the author of annotations to a work.
+\keyitem{annotators} The plural form of \texttt{annotators}.
+\keyitem{organizer} The term <organizer>, referring to the organizer of an
+ event or work.
+\keyitem{organizers} The plural form of \texttt{organizer}.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Concatenated Editor Roles, Expressed as Functions}
+
+The following keys are similar in function to \texttt{editor}, \texttt{translator}, etc. They are used to indicate additional roles of the editor, \eg\ <editor and translator>, <editor and foreword>.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{editortr} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstr} The plural form of \texttt{editortr}.
+\keyitem{editorco} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsco} The plural form of \texttt{editorco}.
+\keyitem{editoran} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsan} The plural form of \texttt{editoran}.
+\keyitem{editorin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsin} The plural form of \texttt{editorin}.
+\keyitem{editorfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsfo} The plural form of \texttt{editorfo}.
+\keyitem{editoraf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsaf} The plural form of \texttt{editoraf}.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{editortrco} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstrco} The plural form of \texttt{editortrco}.
+\keyitem{editortran} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstran} The plural form of \texttt{editortran}.
+\keyitem{editortrin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstrin} The plural form of \texttt{editortrin}.
+\keyitem{editortrfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstrfo} The plural form of \texttt{editortrfo}.
+\keyitem{editortraf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstraf} The plural form of \texttt{editortraf}.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{editorcoin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorscoin} The plural form of \texttt{editorcoin}.
+\keyitem{editorcofo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorscofo} The plural form of \texttt{editorcofo}.
+\keyitem{editorcoaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorscoaf} The plural form of \texttt{editorcoaf}.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{editoranin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsanin} The plural form of \texttt{editoranin}.
+\keyitem{editoranfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsanfo} The plural form of \texttt{editoranfo}.
+\keyitem{editoranaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorsanaf} The plural form of \texttt{editoranaf}.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{editortrcoin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstrcoin} The plural form of \texttt{editortrcoin}.
+\keyitem{editortrcofo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstrcofo} The plural form of \texttt{editortrcofo}.
+\keyitem{editortrcoaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstrcoaf} The plural form of \texttt{editortrcoaf}.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{editortranin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstranin} The plural form of \texttt{editortranin}.
+\keyitem{editortranfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstranfo} The plural form of \texttt{editortranfo}.
+\keyitem{editortranaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{editorstranaf} The plural form of \texttt{editortranaf}.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Concatenated Translator Roles, Expressed as Functions}
+
+The following keys are similar in function to \texttt{translator}. They are used to indicate additional roles of the translator, e.g. <translator and commentator>, <translator and introduction>.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{translatorco} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsco} The plural form of \texttt{translatorco}.
+\keyitem{translatoran} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsan} The plural form of \texttt{translatoran}.
+\keyitem{translatorin} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsin} The plural form of \texttt{translatorin}.
+\keyitem{translatorfo} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsfo} The plural form of \texttt{translatorfo}.
+\keyitem{translatoraf} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsaf} The plural form of \texttt{translatoraf}.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{translatorcoin} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorscoin} The plural form of \texttt{translatorcoin}.
+\keyitem{translatorcofo} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorscofo} The plural form of \texttt{translatorcofo}.
+\keyitem{translatorcoaf} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorscoaf} The plural form of \texttt{translatorcoaf}.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{translatoranin} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsanin} The plural form of \texttt{translatoranin}.
+\keyitem{translatoranfo} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsanfo} The plural form of \texttt{translatoranfo}.
+\keyitem{translatoranaf} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\keyitem{translatorsanaf} The plural form of \texttt{translatoranaf}.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Roles, Expressed as Actions}
+
+The following keys refer to roles which are expressed as an action (<edited by>, <translated by>) rather than as a function (<editor>, <translator>).
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{byauthor} The expression <[created] by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{byeditor} The expression <edited by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{bycompiler} The expression <compiled by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{byfounder} The expression <founded by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{bycontinuator} The expression <continued by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{byredactor} The expression <redacted by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{byreviser} The expression <revised by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{byreviewer} The expression <reviewed by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{bycollaborator} An expression like <in collaboration with \prm{name}> or <in cooperation with \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{bytranslator} The expression <translated by \prm{name}> or <translated from \prm{language} by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{bycommentator} The expression <commented by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{byannotator} The expression <annotated by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{byorganizer} The expression <[organized] by \prm{name}>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Concatenated Editor Roles, Expressed as Actions}
+
+The following keys are similar in function to \bibfield{byeditor}, \bibfield{bytranslator}, etc. They are used to indicate additional roles of the editor, e.g. <edited and translated by>, <edited and furnished with an introduction by>, <edited, with a foreword, by>.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{byeditortr} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditorco} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditoran} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditorin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditorfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditoraf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{byeditortrco} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortran} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortrin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortrfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortraf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{byeditorcoin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditorcofo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditorcoaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{byeditoranin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditoranfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditoranaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{byeditortrcoin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortrcofo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortrcoaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{byeditortranin} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortranfo} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{byeditortranaf} Used if \bibfield{editor}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Concatenated Translator Roles, Expressed as Actions}
+
+The following keys are similar in function to \texttt{bytranslator}. They are used to indicate additional roles of the translator, e.g. <translated and commented by>, <translated and furnished with an introduction by>, <translated, with a foreword, by>.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{bytranslatorco} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatoran} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatorin} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatorfo} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatoraf} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{bytranslatorcoin} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatorcofo} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatorcoaf} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{commentator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Keys for \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \prm{role} combinations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{bytranslatoranin} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{introduction} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatoranfo} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{foreword} are identical.
+\keyitem{bytranslatoranaf} Used if \bibfield{translator}\slash \bibfield{annotator}\slash \bibfield{afterword} are identical.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Roles, Expressed as Objects}
+
+Roles which are related to supplementary material may also be expressed as objects (<with a commentary by>) rather than as functions (<commentator>) or as actions (<commented by>).
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{withcommentator} The expression <with a commentary by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{withannotator} The expression <with annotations by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{withintroduction} The expression <with an introduction by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{withforeword} The expression <with a foreword by \prm{name}>.
+\keyitem{withafterword} The expression <with an afterword by \prm{name}>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Supplementary Material}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{commentary} The term <commentary>.
+\keyitem{annotations} The term <annotations>.
+\keyitem{introduction} The term <introduction>.
+\keyitem{foreword} The term <foreword>.
+\keyitem{afterword} The term <afterword>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Publication Details}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{volume} The term <volume>, referring to a book.
+\keyitem{volumes} The plural form of \texttt{volume}.
+\keyitem{involumes} The term <in>, as used in expressions like <in \prm{number of volumes} volumes>.
+\keyitem{jourvol} The term <volume>, referring to a journal.
+\keyitem{jourser} The term <series>, referring to a journal.
+\keyitem{book} The term <book>, referring to a document division.
+\keyitem{part} The term <part>, referring to a part of a book or a periodical.
+\keyitem{issue} The term <issue>, referring to a periodical.
+\keyitem{newseries} The expression <new series>, referring to a journal.
+\keyitem{oldseries} The expression <old series>, referring to a journal.
+\keyitem{edition} The term <edition>.
+\keyitem{in} The term <in>, referring to the title of a work published as part of another one, e.g. <\prm{title of article} in \prm{title of journal}>.
+\keyitem{inseries} The term <in>, as used in expressions like <volume \prm{number} in \prm{name of series}>.
+\keyitem{ofseries} The term <of>, as used in expressions like <volume \prm{number} of \prm{name of series}>.
+\keyitem{number} The term <number>, referring to an issue of a journal.
+\keyitem{chapter} The term <chapter>, referring to a chapter in a book.
+\keyitem{version} The term <version>, referring to a revision number.
+\keyitem{reprint} The term <reprint>.
+\keyitem{reprintof} The expression <reprint of \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{reprintas} The expression <reprinted as \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{reprintfrom} The expression <reprinted from \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{translationof} The expression <translation of \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{translationas} The expression <translated as \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{translationfrom} The expression <translated from [the] \prm{language}>.
+\keyitem{reviewof} The expression <review of \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{origpubas} The expression <originally published as \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{origpubin} The expression <originally published in \prm{year}>.
+\keyitem{astitle} The term <as>, as used in expressions like <published by \prm{publisher} as \prm{title}>.
+\keyitem{bypublisher} The term <by>, as used in expressions like <published by \prm{publisher}>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Publication State}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{inpreparation} The expression <in preparation> (the manuscript is being prepared for publication).
+\keyitem{submitted} The expression <submitted> (the manuscript has been submitted to a journal or conference).
+\keyitem{forthcoming} The expression <forthcoming> (the manuscript has been accepted by a press or journal).
+\keyitem{inpress} The expression <in press> (the manuscript is fully copyedited and out of the author's hands; it is in the final stages of the production process).
+\keyitem{prepublished} The expression <pre-published> (the manuscript is published in a preliminary form or location, such as online version in advance of print publication).
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Pagination}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{page} The term <page>.
+\keyitem{pages} The plural form of \texttt{page}.
+\keyitem{column} The term <column>, referring to a column on a page.
+\keyitem{columns} The plural form of \texttt{column}.
+\keyitem{section} The term <section>, referring to a document division (usually abbreviated as \S).
+\keyitem{sections} The plural form of \texttt{section} (usually abbreviated as \S\S).
+\keyitem{paragraph} The term <paragraph> (\ie a block of text, not to be confused with \texttt{section}).
+\keyitem{paragraphs} The plural form of \texttt{paragraph}.
+\keyitem{verse} The term <verse> as used when referring to a work which is cited by verse numbers.
+\keyitem{verses} The plural form of \texttt{verse}.
+\keyitem{line} The term <line> as used when referring to a work which is cited by line numbers.
+\keyitem{lines} The plural form of \texttt{line}.
+\keyitem{pagetotal} The term <page> as used in \cmd{mkpageprefix}.
+\keyitem{pagetotals} The plural form of \texttt{pagetotal}.
+\keyitem{columntotal} The term <column>, referring to a column on a page, as used in \cmd{mkpageprefix}.
+\keyitem{columntotals} The plural form of \texttt{columntotal}.
+\keyitem{sectiontotal} The term <section>, referring to a document division (usually abbreviated as \S), as used in \cmd{mkpageprefix}.
+\keyitem{sectiontotals} The plural form of \texttt{sectiontotal} (usually abbreviated as \S\S).
+\keyitem{paragraphtotal} The term <paragraph> (\ie a block of text, not to be confused with \texttt{section}) as used in \cmd{mkpageprefix}.
+\keyitem{paragraphtotals} The plural form of \texttt{paragraphtotal}.
+\keyitem{versetotal} The term <verse> as used when referring to a work which is cited by verse numbers when used in \cmd{mkpageprefix}.
+\keyitem{versetotals} The plural form of \texttt{versetotal}.
+\keyitem{linetotal} The term <line> as used when referring to a work which is cited by line numbers when used in \cmd{mkpageprefix}.
+\keyitem{linetotals} The plural form of \texttt{linetotal}.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Types}
+
+The following keys are typically used in the \bibfield{type} field of \bibtype{thesis}, \bibtype{report}, \bibtype{misc}, and other entries:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{bathesis} An expression equivalent to the term <Bachelor's thesis>.
+\keyitem{mathesis} An expression equivalent to the term <Master's thesis>.
+\keyitem{phdthesis} The term <PhD thesis>, <PhD dissertation>, <doctoral thesis>, etc.
+\keyitem{candthesis} An expression equivalent to the term <Candidate thesis>. Used for <Candidate> degrees that have no clear equivalent to the Master's or doctoral level.
+\keyitem{techreport} The term <technical report>.
+\keyitem{resreport} The term <research report>.
+\keyitem{software} The term <computer software>.
+\keyitem{datacd} The term <data \textsc{cd}> or <\textsc{cd-rom}>.
+\keyitem{audiocd} The term <audio \textsc{cd}>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Dates and Times}
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{commonera} The term used to denote the secular era modern term \eg\ <CE>.
+\keyitem{beforecommonera} The term used to denote the secular era pre-modern term \eg\ <BCE>.
+\keyitem{annodomini} The term used to denote the christian era modern term \eg\ <AD>.
+\keyitem{beforechrist} The term used to denote the christian era pre-modern term \eg\ <BC>.
+\keyitem{circa} The string prefix used to denote approximate dates \eg\ <circa>.
+\keyitem{spring} The string <spring>.
+\keyitem{summer} The string <summer>.
+\keyitem{autumn} The string <autumn>.
+\keyitem{winter} The string <winter>.
+\keyitem{am} The string <AM>.
+\keyitem{pm} The string <PM>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Miscellaneous}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{nodate} The term to use in place of a date when there is no date for an entry \eg\ <n.d.>
+\keyitem{and} The term <and>, as used in a list of authors or editors, for example.
+\keyitem{andothers} The expression <and others> or <et alii>, used to mark the truncation of a name list.
+\keyitem{andmore} Like \texttt{andothers} but used to mark the truncation of a literal list.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Labels}
+
+The following strings are intended for use as labels, \eg\ <Address: \prm{url}> or <Abstract: \prm{abstract}>.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{url} The term <address> in the sense of an internet address.
+\keyitem{urlfrom} An expression like <available from \prm{url}> or <available at \prm{url}>.
+\keyitem{urlseen} An expression like <accessed on \prm{date}>, <retrieved on \prm{date}>, <visited on \prm{date}>, referring to the access date of an online resource.
+\keyitem{file} The term <file>.
+\keyitem{library} The term <library>.
+\keyitem{abstract} The term <abstract>.
+\keyitem{annotation} The term <annotations>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Citations}
+
+Traditional scholarly expressions used in citations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{idem} The term equivalent to the Latin <idem> (<the same [person]>).
+\keyitem{idemsf} The feminine singular form of \texttt{idem}.
+\keyitem{idemsm} The masculine singular form of \texttt{idem}.
+\keyitem{idemsn} The neuter singular form of \texttt{idem}.
+\keyitem{idempf} The feminine plural form of \texttt{idem}.
+\keyitem{idempm} The masculine plural form of \texttt{idem}.
+\keyitem{idempn} The neuter plural form of \texttt{idem}.
+\keyitem{idempp} The plural form of \texttt{idem} suitable for a mixed gender list of names.
+\keyitem{ibidem} The term equivalent to the Latin <ibidem> (<in the same place>).
+\keyitem{opcit} The term equivalent to the Latin term <opere citato> (<[in] the work [already] cited>).
+\keyitem{loccit} The term equivalent to the Latin term <loco citato> (<[at] the place [already] cited>).
+\keyitem{confer} The term equivalent to the Latin <confer> (<compare>).
+\keyitem{sequens} The term equivalent to the Latin <sequens> (<[and] the following [page]>), as used to indicate a range of two pages when only the starting page is provided (\eg\ <25\,sq.> or <25\,f.> instead of <25--26>).
+\keyitem{sequentes} The term equivalent to the Latin <sequentes> (<[and] the following [pages]>), as used to indicate an open"=ended range of pages when only the starting page is provided (\eg\ <25\,sqq.> or <25\,ff.>).
+\keyitem{passim} The term equivalent to the Latin <passim> (<throughout>, <here and there>, <scatteredly>).
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Other expressions frequently used in citations:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{see} The term <see>.
+\keyitem{seealso} The expression <see also>.
+\keyitem{seenote} An expression like <see note \prm{footnote}> or <as in \prm{footnote}>, used to refer to a previous footnote in a citation.
+\keyitem{backrefpage} An expression like <see page \prm{page}> or <cited on page \prm{page}>, used to introduce back references in the bibliography.
+\keyitem{backrefpages} The plural form of \texttt{backrefpage}, \eg\ <see pages \prm{pages}> or <cited on pages \prm{pages}>.
+\keyitem{quotedin} An expression like <quoted in \prm{citation}>, used when quoting a passage which was already a quotation in the cited work.
+\keyitem{citedas} An expression like <henceforth cited as \prm{shorthand}>, used to introduce a shorthand in a citation.
+\keyitem{thiscite} The expression used in some verbose citation styles to differentiate between the page range of the cited item (typically an article in a journal, collection, or conference proceedings) and the page number the citation refers to. For example: \enquote{Author, Title, in: Book, pp. 45--61, \texttt{thiscite} p. 52.}
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Month Names}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{january} The name <January>.
+\keyitem{february} The name <February>.
+\keyitem{march} The name <March>.
+\keyitem{april} The name <April>.
+\keyitem{may} The name <May>.
+\keyitem{june} The name <June>.
+\keyitem{july} The name <July>.
+\keyitem{august} The name <August>.
+\keyitem{september} The name <September>.
+\keyitem{october} The name <October>.
+\keyitem{november} The name <November>.
+\keyitem{december} The name <December>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Language Names}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{langamerican} The language <American> or <American English>.
+\keyitem{langbrazilian} The language <Brazilian> or <Brazilian Portuguese>.
+\keyitem{langbulgarian} The language <Bulgarian>.
+\keyitem{langcatalan} The language <Catalan>.
+\keyitem{langcroatian} The language <Croatian>.
+\keyitem{langczech} The language <Czech>.
+\keyitem{langdanish} The language <Danish>.
+\keyitem{langdutch} The language <Dutch>.
+\keyitem{langenglish} The language <English>.
+\keyitem{langestonian} The language <Estonian>.
+\keyitem{langfinnish} The language <Finnish>.
+\keyitem{langfrench} The language <French>.
+\keyitem{langgerman} The language <German>.
+\keyitem{langgreek} The language <Greek>.
+\keyitem{langhungarian} The language <Hungarian>.
+\keyitem{langitalian} The language <Italian>.
+\keyitem{langjapanese} The language <Japanese>.
+\keyitem{langlatin} The language <Latin>.
+\keyitem{langlatvian} The language <Latvian>.
+\keyitem{langnorwegian} The language <Norwegian>.
+\keyitem{langpolish} The language <Polish>.
+\keyitem{langportuguese} The language <Portuguese>.
+\keyitem{langrussian} The language <Russian>.
+\keyitem{langslovak} The language <Slovak>.
+\keyitem{langslovene} The language <Slovene>.
+\keyitem{langspanish} The language <Spanish>.
+\keyitem{langswedish} The language <Swedish>.
+\keyitem{langukrainian} The language <Ukrainian>.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+The following strings are intended for use in phrases like <translated from [the] English by \prm{translator}>:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{fromamerican} The expression <from [the] American> or <from [the] American English>.
+\keyitem{frombrazilian} The expression <from [the] Brazilian> or <from [the] Brazilian Portuguese>.
+\keyitem{frombulgarian} The expression <from [the] Bulgarian>.
+\keyitem{fromcatalan} The expression <from [the] Catalan>.
+\keyitem{fromcroatian} The expression <from [the] Croatian>.
+\keyitem{fromczech} The expression <from [the] Czech>.
+\keyitem{fromdanish} The expression <from [the] Danish>.
+\keyitem{fromdutch} The expression <from [the] Dutch>.
+\keyitem{fromenglish} The expression <from [the] English>.
+\keyitem{fromestonian} The expression <from [the] Estonian>.
+\keyitem{fromfinnish} The expression <from [the] Finnish>.
+\keyitem{fromfrench} The expression <from [the] French>.
+\keyitem{fromgerman} The expression <from [the] German>.
+\keyitem{fromgreek} The expression <from [the] Greek>.
+\keyitem{fromhungarian} The language <from [the] Hungarian>.
+\keyitem{fromitalian} The expression <from [the] Italian>.
+\keyitem{fromjapanese} The expression <from [the] Japanese>.
+\keyitem{fromlatin} The expression <from [the] Latin>.
+\keyitem{fromlatvian} The expression <from [the] Latvian>.
+\keyitem{fromnorwegian} The expression <from [the] Norwegian>.
+\keyitem{frompolish} The expression <from [the] Polish>.
+\keyitem{fromportuguese} The expression <from [the] Portuguese>.
+\keyitem{fromrussian} The expression <from [the] Russian>.
+\keyitem{fromslovak} The expression <from [the] Slovak>.
+\keyitem{fromslovene} The expression <from [the] Slovene>.
+\keyitem{fromspanish} The expression <from [the] Spanish>.
+\keyitem{fromswedish} The expression <from [the] Swedish>.
+\keyitem{fromukrainian} The expression <from [the] Ukrainian>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Country Names}
+
+Country names are localised by using the string \texttt{country} plus the \acr{ISO}-3166 country code as the key. The short version of the translation should be the \acr{ISO}-3166 country code. Note that only a small number of country names is defined by default, mainly to illustrate this scheme. These keys are used in the \bibfield{location} list of \bibtype{patent} entries but they may be useful for other purposes as well.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{countryde} The name <Germany>, abbreviated as \texttt{DE}.
+\keyitem{countryeu} The name <European Union>, abbreviated as \texttt{EU}.
+\keyitem{countryep} Similar to \texttt{countryeu} but abbreviated as \texttt{EP}. This is intended for \bibfield{patent} entries.
+\keyitem{countryfr} The name <France>, abbreviated as \texttt{FR}.
+\keyitem{countryuk} The name <United Kingdom>, abbreviated (according to \acr{ISO}-3166) as \texttt{GB}.
+\keyitem{countryus} The name <United States of America>, abbreviated as \texttt{US}.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Patents and Patent Requests}
+
+Strings related to patents are localised by using the term \texttt{patent} plus the \acr{ISO}-3166 country code as the key. Note that only a small number of patent keys is defined by default, mainly to illustrate this scheme. These keys are used in the \bibfield{type} field of \bibtype{patent} entries.
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{patent} The generic term <patent>.
+\keyitem{patentde} The expression <German patent>.
+\keyitem{patenteu} The expression <European patent>.
+\keyitem{patentfr} The expression <French patent>.
+\keyitem{patentuk} The expression <British patent>.
+\keyitem{patentus} The expression <U.S. patent>.
+\end{keylist}
+%
+Patent requests are handled in a similar way, using the string \texttt{patreq} as the base name of the key:
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{patreq} The generic term <patent request>.
+\keyitem{patreqde} The expression <German patent request>.
+\keyitem{patreqeu} The expression <European patent request>.
+\keyitem{patreqfr} The expression <French patent request>.
+\keyitem{patrequk} The expression <British patent request>.
+\keyitem{patrequs} The expression <U.S. patent request>.
+\end{keylist}
+
+\subsection*{Dates and Times}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{commonera} The era <CE>
+\keyitem{beforecommonera} The era <BCE>
+\keyitem{annodomini} The era <AD>
+\keyitem{beforechrist} The era <BC>
+\end{keylist}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{circa} The string <circa>
+\end{keylist}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{spring} The string <spring>
+\keyitem{summer} The string <summer>
+\keyitem{autumn} The string <autumn>
+\keyitem{winter} The string <winter>
+\end{keylist}
+
+\begin{keylist}
+\keyitem{am} The string <AM>
+\keyitem{pm} The string <PM>
+\end{keylist}
+
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..28956fdacc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4344e1f51a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..29b1450ffa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/04-delimiters.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage{verbatim}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+
+\DeclareDelimFormat[bib]{space}{X}
+\DeclareDelimFormat[test]{space}{Y}
+\DeclareDelimFormat{testb}{B}
+\DeclareDelimFormat[testbcontext]{testb}{C}
+\DeclareDelimFormat{testc}{D}
+\DeclareDelimFormat[testccontext]{testc}{E}
+\makeatletter
+% Some of these tests generate definition warnins which we don't want in tests
+\def\blx@warn@delimdeclare#1#2{\relax}
+\makeatother
+\begin{document}
+\section*{Context-Sensitive Delimiters}
+
+Normal cite uses global delim definition with comma:\\\\
+\cite{averroes/hannes}\\\\
+Textual cite uses "textcite" context without comma:\\\\
+\textcite{averroes/hannes}\\\\
+Reset of global delimiter with traditional method:\\\\
+\renewcommand*{\nametitledelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\cite{averroes/hannes}\\\\
+Textual cite in "textcite" context is not reset:\\\\
+\textcite{averroes/hannes}\\\\
+\begingroup
+\def\addcomma{,}
+\let\space\textvisiblespace
+Invoke default delimiter in context-sensitive interface:\\
+\printdelim{nametitledelim}\\\\
+Invoke global delimiter via normal macro:\\
+\nametitledelim\\\\
+Invoke delimiter in context-sensitive interface with explicit context:\\\\
+\printdelim[textcite]{nametitledelim}\\\\
+\endgroup
+Default delimiter "testb":\\\\
+\printdelim{testb}\\\\
+Setting "testbcontext" with \cmd{delimcontext}:\\\\
+\delimcontext{testbcontext}\printdelim{testb}\\\\
+Redefine "testb" delim with starred version to remove all contexts:\\\\
+\DeclareDelimFormat*{testb}{B}
+\printdelim{testb}\\\\
+Check nesting\\\\
+\begingroup
+\delimcontext{testccontext}\printdelim{testc}\\\\
+\endgroup
+\printdelim{testc}\\\\
+\printbibliography
+
+Reset the \cmd{space} command for this bibliography to use the
+context-sensitive interface. First we use the default "bib" context:
+\AtNextBibliography{\renewcommand*{\space}{\printdelim{space}}}
+\printbibliography
+
+Now use a custom context "test" and \cmd{space} expands to something
+different. Also, "nametitledelim" is back to default because we override
+the default "bib" context:
+\AtNextBibliography{\renewcommand*{\space}{\printdelim{space}}\delimcontext{test}}
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..10c12fbf19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..931645e425
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1743e5bf1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/10-references-per-section.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates a setup typically used in a collection of
+% articles by different authors, such as a conference proceedings
+% volume for example. Each article is presented as a separate
+% chapter with its own bibliography. The citation labels are local
+% to the 'refsection' environments.
+%
+% With Biber, this file is processed as follows:
+%
+% latex file
+% biber file
+% latex file
+%
+% With BibTeX, this file is processed as follows:
+%
+% latex file
+% bibtex file1-blx
+% bibtex file2-blx
+% bibtex file3-blx
+% latex file
+%
+% Note that the file name suffix may generally be omitted. It's
+% 'latex file' and 'bibtex file' rather than 'latex file.tex' and
+% 'bibtex file.aux'. Depending on the TeX distribution, omitting the
+% 'aux' file prefix when invoking BibTeX may even by mandatory.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=numeric,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\begin{document}
+
+\chapter{Title of first chapter}
+\begin{refsection}
+This is just filler text \parencite{massa}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{augustine}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{cotton}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{hammond}.
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography]
+\end{refsection}
+
+\chapter{Title of second chapter}
+\begin{refsection}
+This is just filler text \parencite{hammond}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{massa}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{cotton}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{murray}.
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography]
+\end{refsection}
+
+\chapter{Title of third chapter}
+\begin{refsection}
+This is just filler text \parencite{murray}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{augustine}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{cotton}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{bertram}.
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography]
+\end{refsection}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..57a5d24c06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..176278e5eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a97f7cc7ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/11-references-by-section.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+%
+% This file is similar to the 'per section' example except that
+% all references are printed at the end of the document. The
+% citation labels are still local to the 'refsection' environments.
+%
+% With Biber, this file is processed as follows:
+%
+% latex file
+% biber file
+% latex file
+%
+% With BibTeX, this file is processed as follows:
+%
+% latex file
+% bibtex file1-blx
+% bibtex file2-blx
+% bibtex file3-blx
+% latex file
+%
+% Note that the file name suffix may generally be omitted. It's
+% 'latex file' and 'bibtex file' rather than 'latex file.tex' and
+% 'bibtex file.aux'. Depending on the TeX distribution, omitting the
+% 'aux' file prefix when invoking BibTeX may even by mandatory.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\defbibheading{subbibliography}{%
+ \section*{%
+ Chapter \therefsection:
+ \nameref{refsection:\therefsection}}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\chapter{Title of first chapter}
+\begin{refsection}
+This is just filler text \parencite{westfahl:space}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{nietzsche:ksa}.
+\end{refsection}
+
+\chapter{Title of second chapter}
+\begin{refsection}
+This is just filler text \parencite{nietzsche:historie}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{westfahl:frontier}.
+\end{refsection}
+
+\chapter{Title of third chapter}
+\begin{refsection}
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{averroes/bland}.
+\end{refsection}
+
+\printbibheading
+\bibbysection[heading=subbibliography]
+%
+% \bibbysection is a shorthand for:
+%
+% \printbibliography[section=1]
+% \printbibliography[section=2]
+% \printbibliography[section=3]
+% ...
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bec8fa28fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1dafa8f85a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ccefb9a7c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+%
+% This file differs from the 'by section' example in that the
+% citation labels are assigned globally. They are not local to the
+% 'refsegment' environments.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\defbibheading{subbibliography}{%
+ \section*{%
+ Chapter \therefsegment:
+ \nameref{refsegment:\therefsection\therefsegment}}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\chapter{Title of first chapter}
+\begin{refsegment}
+This is just filler text \parencite{westfahl:space}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{nietzsche:ksa}.
+\end{refsegment}
+
+\chapter{Title of second chapter}
+\begin{refsegment}
+This is just filler text \parencite{nietzsche:historie}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{westfahl:frontier}.
+\end{refsegment}
+
+\chapter{Title of third chapter}
+\begin{refsegment}
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{averroes/bland}.
+\end{refsegment}
+
+\printbibheading
+\bibbysegment[heading=subbibliography]
+%
+% \bibbysegment is a shorthand for:
+%
+% \printbibliography[segment=1]
+% \printbibliography[segment=2]
+% \printbibliography[segment=3]
+% ...
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5281609fdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3b193af84f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..56c65e1f1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+%
+% It is common requirement to subdivide a bibliography by certain
+% criteria. This example demonstrates how to use keyword filters to
+% subdivide the list of references into primary and secondary
+% sources.
+%
+% The keyword filter depends on the 'keywords' fields in the bib
+% file. The entries cited in this example are set up like this:
+%
+% @Type{key,
+% keywords = {primary},
+% ...
+% }
+%
+% @Type{key,
+% keywords = {secondary},
+% ...
+% }
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\begin{document}
+
+\chapter{References by keyword}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{nussbaum}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{hyman}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{moraux}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{pines}
+
+\printbibheading
+\printbibliography[keyword=primary,heading=subbibliography,title={Primary Sources}]
+\printbibliography[keyword=secondary,heading=subbibliography,title={Secondary Sources}]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..49cf1b3c5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4ee57c61c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..970250019a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/14-references-by-category.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+%
+% This example will yield the same output as the 'keywords' example
+% but the approach is different. Instead of adding the filter
+% criteria to the bib file, we assign keys to categories in the
+% document preamble and use 'category' filters to create a
+% subdivided bibliography.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\DeclareBibliographyCategory{primary}
+\DeclareBibliographyCategory{secondary}
+\addtocategory{primary}{aristotle:anima,aristotle:physics,averroes/bland}
+\addtocategory{secondary}{hyman,moraux,nussbaum,pines}
+\defbibheading{primary}{\section*{Primary Sources}}
+\defbibheading{secondary}{\section*{Secondary Sources}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\chapter{References by category}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{nussbaum}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{hyman}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{moraux}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{pines}
+
+\printbibheading
+\bibbycategory
+%
+% \bibbycategory processes the categories in the order in which they
+% were declared. Note that the category name also serves as a heading
+% identifier, i.e. you need to define a matching heading for every
+% category. In this document, \bibbycategory is a shorthand for:
+%
+% \printbibliography[heading=primary,category=primary]
+% \printbibliography[heading=secondary,category=secondary]
+% ...
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e0f23be5f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..26b0442440
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1af848df15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/15-references-by-type.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+%
+% This example demonstrates how to subdivide a bibliography by type,
+% using 'type' filters.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\begin{document}
+
+\chapter{References by type}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{knuth:ct:a}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{ctan}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{companion}.
+This is just filler text \parencite{markey}.
+
+\printbibheading
+\printbibliography[nottype=online,heading=subbibliography,title={Printed Sources}]
+\printbibliography[type=online,heading=subbibliography,title={Online Sources}]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..05cbf46bcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d36734df00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2ba9fa7417
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates how to configure biblatex to prefix
+% numerical citations with a letter or a string. This will work with
+% all numerical styles which ship with biblatex. Note that you must
+% set defernumbers=true globally when using prefixes.
+%
+% Since the prefixes are assigned as the bibliography is generated,
+% you may use any filter supported by biblatex to subdivide the
+% references (by type, by category, by keyword, etc.).
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+% When using prefixed numerical labels, the labels must be assigned
+% as the bibliography is generated. That's why we set
+% defernumbers=true here:
+\usepackage[style=numeric,defernumbers,backend=bibtex]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% A catch-all filter for all items which are not assigned to a
+% dedicated sub-bibliography:
+\defbibfilter{other}{
+ not type=article
+ and
+ not type=book
+ and
+ not type=collection
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Prefixed numerical citations}
+
+% Some citations:
+\cite{angenendt, kastenholz, augustine, companion, jaffe, ctan}
+
+\nocite{*}
+
+% Let's print the overall heading of the bibliography first:
+\printbibheading
+
+% And now the sub-bibliographies: we use three of them (based on the
+% entry type). Each sub-bibliography assigns a different prefix:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Articles},type=article, prefixnumbers={A}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Books},type=book, prefixnumbers={B}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Collections},type=collection, prefixnumbers={C}]
+
+% The catch-all sub-bibliography for all remaining types:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Other Sources},filter=other, prefixnumbers={O}]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d8597789b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates how to configure biblatex to prefix
+% numerical citations with a letter or a string. This will work with
+% all numerical styles which ship with biblatex. Note that you must
+% set defernumbers=true globally when using prefixes.
+%
+% Since the prefixes are assigned as the bibliography is generated,
+% you may use any filter supported by biblatex to subdivide the
+% references (by type, by category, by keyword, etc.).
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+% When using prefixed numerical labels, the labels must be assigned
+% as the bibliography is generated. That's why we set
+% defernumbers=true here:
+\usepackage[style=numeric,defernumbers,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% A catch-all filter for all items which are not assigned to a
+% dedicated sub-bibliography:
+\defbibfilter{other}{
+ not type=article
+ and
+ not type=book
+ and
+ not type=collection
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Prefixed numerical citations}
+
+% Some citations:
+\cite{angenendt, kastenholz, augustine, companion, jaffe, ctan}
+
+\nocite{*}
+
+% Let's print the overall heading of the bibliography first:
+\printbibheading
+
+% And now the sub-bibliographies: we use three of them (based on the
+% entry type). Each sub-bibliography assigns a different prefix:
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={A}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Articles},type=article]
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={B}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Books},type=book]
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={C}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Collections},type=collection]
+
+% The catch-all sub-bibliography for all remaining types:
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={O}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Other Sources},filter=other]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..138a32a2de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dd0c6992a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c0952bab42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+%
+% This example is almost the same as the previous one except that
+% the catch-all sub-bibliography does not assign any prefix.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=numeric,defernumbers,backend=bibtex]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\defbibfilter{other}{
+ not type=article
+ and
+ not type=book
+ and
+ not type=collection
+}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Prefixed numerical citations}
+
+% Some citations:
+\cite{angenendt, kastenholz, augustine, companion, jaffe, ctan}
+
+\nocite{*}
+
+\printbibheading
+
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Articles},type=article, prefixnumbers={A}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Books},type=book, prefixnumbers={A}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Collections},type=collection, prefixnumbers={C}]
+
+% The catch-all sub-bibliography for all remaining types. We don't
+% use a prefix but we still need to set resetnumbers=true to restart
+% the item numbering:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Other Sources},filter=other,resetnumbers]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cd00b02293
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+%
+% This example is almost the same as the previous one except that
+% the catch-all sub-bibliography does not assign any prefix.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=numeric,defernumbers,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\defbibfilter{other}{
+ not type=article
+ and
+ not type=book
+ and
+ not type=collection
+}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Prefixed numerical citations}
+
+% Some citations:
+\cite{angenendt, kastenholz, augustine, companion, jaffe, ctan}
+
+\nocite{*}
+
+\printbibheading
+
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={A}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Articles},type=article]
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={B}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Books},type=book]
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={C}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Collections},type=collection]
+\endrefcontext
+
+% The catch-all sub-bibliography for all remaining types. We don't
+% use a prefix but we still need to set resetnumbers=true to restart
+% the item numbering:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Other Sources},filter=other,resetnumbers]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2e0eaa612d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..39c469234b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ebf3117955
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+%
+% This example demonstrates how hybrid citations, i.e., two
+% citations styles in a single document, may be implemented.
+% Note that the default styles which ship with bibatex do not
+% support hybrid citation schemes out of the box. This example
+% is merely a proof of concept.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+% We use the authoryear style as a basis but we want numerical
+% labels for all online references. Therefore, we request numeric
+% labels by setting 'labelnumber=true'. We also set
+% 'defernumbers=true'. This will be required by the 'omitnumbers'
+% option used below.
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,labelnumber,defernumbers,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+
+% We define a dedicated citation command for online references which
+% uses numerical labels instead of the author-year scheme. Instead
+% of defining a dedicated command, it is also possible (and usually
+% preferable) to build smart citation commands which are able to
+% switch citation styles depending on the entry type (or other
+% criteria). It's just easier to demonstrate the point of the
+% 'omitnumbers' option this way:
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\citeonline}[\mkbibbrackets]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{%
+ \printfield{labelprefix}%
+ \printfield{labelnumber}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+% The matching environment for the online sub-bibliography:
+
+\defbibenvironment{online}
+ {\list
+ {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\printfield{labelprefix}%
+ \printfield{labelnumber}}
+ {\printfield{shorthand}}}}
+ {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}}
+ {\endlist}
+ {\item}
+
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Hybrid citations}
+
+\subsection*{Regular citations (author-year)}
+
+\cite{augustine},
+\cite{bertram},
+\cite{companion}
+
+\subsection*{Online citations (numeric)}
+
+\citeonline{ctan},
+\citeonline{markey}
+
+% Let's print the overall heading of the bibliography first:
+\printbibheading
+
+% We set omitnumbers=true for the author-year sub-bibliography.
+% Without that, the first item of the online bibliography would be
+% labeled as "[4]".
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Printed References},nottype=online,omitnumbers]
+
+% The online sub-bibliography requires a different environment:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Online References},env=online,type=online]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3504e45685
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..417d0b241a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..31cac5de0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+%
+% Prefixes also work with alphabetic the styles.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=alphabetic,backend=bibtex]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% A catch-all filter for all items which are not assigned to a
+% dedicated sub-bibliography:
+\defbibfilter{other}{
+ not type=article
+ and
+ not type=book
+ and
+ not type=collection
+}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Prefixed alphabetic citations}
+
+% Some citations:
+\cite{angenendt, kastenholz, augustine, companion, jaffe, ctan}
+
+\nocite{*}
+
+% Let's print the overall heading of the bibliography first:
+\printbibheading
+
+% And now the sub-bibliographies: we use three of them (based on the
+% entry type). Each sub-bibliography assigns a different prefix. The
+% option is called 'prefixnumbers' because it was originally intended
+% for numeric citations only. It also works with alphabetic labels:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Articles},type=article,prefixnumbers={A-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Books},type=book,prefixnumbers={B-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Collections},type=collection,prefixnumbers={C-}]
+
+% The catch-all sub-bibliography for all remaining types:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Other Sources},filter=other,prefixnumbers={O-}]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f08ecea236
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+%
+% Prefixes also work with alphabetic the styles.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=alphabetic,defernumbers,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% A catch-all filter for all items which are not assigned to a
+% dedicated sub-bibliography:
+\defbibfilter{other}{
+ not type=article
+ and
+ not type=book
+ and
+ not type=collection
+}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Prefixed alphabetic citations}
+
+% Some citations:
+\cite{angenendt, kastenholz, augustine, companion, jaffe, ctan}
+
+\nocite{*}
+
+% Let's print the overall heading of the bibliography first:
+\printbibheading
+
+% And now the sub-bibliographies: we use three of them (based on the
+% entry type). Each sub-bibliography assigns a different prefix.
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={A-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Articles},type=article]
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={B-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Books},type=book]
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={C-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Collections},type=collection]
+
+% The catch-all sub-bibliography for all remaining types:
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix={O-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Other Sources},filter=other]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3b962a988b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..725668602a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d580400e2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/20-indexing-single.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates indexing with the 'makeidx' package.
+% This file is processed as follows:
+%
+% latex file
+% bibtex/biber file
+% latex file
+% makeindex file
+% latex file
+%
+% Note that the file name suffix may be omitted. It's 'latex file'
+% and not 'latex file.tex'.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+%
+% We set the 'indexing' package option ('indexing' is similar to
+% 'indexing=true') to enable indexing in both citations and the
+% bibliography. It is rather unusual to add bibliography entries to
+% the index so you will normally use 'indexing=cite' instead. The
+% only reason we're indexing the bibliography in this example is to
+% get a larger index. For a change, let's also use the 'authortitle'
+% style in this example.
+\usepackage[indexing,style=authortitle,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+%
+% The 'makeidx' package provides indexing facilities on a fairly
+% basic level. It is highly advisable to use the 'index' package
+% instead, even if you do not need the additional facilities
+% provided by this package, such as multiple indexes. The reason is
+% that the \index command defined by this package is more robust
+% than the basic command provided by 'makeidx'.
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+% We need to enable indexing globally by way of \makeindex.
+% Otherwise, no index is created at all, regardless of the
+% 'indexing' option of biblatex.
+\makeindex
+%
+% Note that biblatex uses makeindex's 'actual' operator to pass the
+% 'indexsorttitle' field to makeindex. The default character used
+% is '@'. If the makeindex style uses a different character, i.e.,
+% if the .ist file contains a line like this
+%
+% actual '='
+%
+% you need to redefine \actualoperator accordingly:
+%
+% \renewcommand*{\actualoperator}{=}
+%
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Indexing with the \texttt{makeidx} package}
+
+% We add the contents of the entire bib file to the bibliography.
+% Note that \nocite does not add anything to the index on its own.
+\nocite{*}
+
+% We cite a few items. These citations will be added to the index.
+\cite{piccato,gaonkar,malinowski,coleridge,gerhardt,cicero}
+
+% We also add an explicit index entry.
+\index{Example entry}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% We print the printbibliography...
+\printbibliography
+% ...and the index
+\raggedright
+\printindex
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7119511191
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c2dd6a5890
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3ae30c0a9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/21-indexing-multiple.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates indexing with the 'index' package.
+% This file is processed as follows:
+%
+% latex file
+% bibtex/biber file
+% latex file
+% makeindex -o file.ind file.idx (= makeindex file)
+% makeindex -o file.nnd file.ndx
+% makeindex -o file.tnd file.tdx
+% latex file
+%
+% Note that the file name suffix may be omitted. It's 'latex file'
+% and not 'latex file.tex'. Also note that '-t <file>' is optional.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+%
+% The 'index' package provides advanced indexing facilities with
+% support for multiple indexes.
+\usepackage{index}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+%
+% We set the 'indexing' package option and use the 'authortitle'
+% style in this example.
+\usepackage[indexing,style=authortitle,autolang=hyphen,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+%
+% We want three indexes: a general index, an index of names, and an
+% index of titles. They are defined by way of \newindex, see the
+% documentation of the 'index' package for details.
+\newindex{default}{idx}{ind}{Subject Index}
+\newindex{names}{ndx}{nnd}{Name Index}
+\newindex{titles}{tdx}{tnd}{Title Index}
+%
+% We need to redefine some index formatting directives such that
+% biblatex adds names and titles to separate indexes. All names
+% should go to the name index, hence we simply redefine the default
+% index formatting directive for names. The default definition,
+% which is found in biblatex.def, looks like this:
+%
+% \DeclareIndexNameFormat{default}{%
+% \usebibmacro{index:name}{\index}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
+% }
+%
+% As you can see, the data is simply passed on to a 'bibmacro' which
+% takes care of the formatting of the name. The definition of the
+% bibmacro, which is also found in biblatex.def, is not relevant in
+% our example because all we want to do is change or rather extend
+% the \index command, which happens to be the first argument of the
+% 'index:name' bibmacro.
+%
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{biblatex_legacy}
+ {\DeclareIndexNameFormat{default}{%
+ \usebibmacro{index:name}{\index[names]}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}
+ {\DeclareIndexNameFormat{default}{%
+ \usebibmacro{index:name}{\index[names]}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartprefix}
+ {\namepartsuffix}}}
+\makeatother
+%
+% Titles are handled in a similar way. The formatting directive we
+% need to modify is 'indextitle'. It's default definition looks like
+% this:
+%
+% \DeclareIndexFieldFormat{indextitle}{%
+% \usebibmacro{index:title}{\index}{#1}%
+% }
+%
+% We modify it such that the \index command writes to the index of
+% titles:
+%
+\DeclareIndexFieldFormat{indextitle}{%
+ \usebibmacro{index:title}{\index[titles]}{#1}%
+}
+%
+% That's it as far as splitting the index is concerned. Let's have a
+% look at some other facilities you may want to customize. By
+% default, biblatex will index the author or editor and the title of
+% all references. This behavior may be modified as desired. The
+% indexing facilities are not hard-coded. All standard styles which
+% ship with this package call two 'bibmacros' which handle the
+% indexing. These macros are called 'citeindex' and 'bibindex', both
+% of which are defined in biblatex.def. The former handles indexing
+% in citations, the latter in the bibliography. Their default
+% definitions are as follows:
+%
+% \newbibmacro*{citeindex}{%
+% \ifciteindex
+% {\indexnames{labelname}%
+% \indexfield{indextitle}}
+% {}}
+%
+% \newbibmacro*{bibindex}{%
+% \ifbibindex
+% {\indexnames{labelname}%
+% \indexfield{indextitle}}
+% {}}
+%
+% The 'labelname' field is a copy of the 'author' field, if there is
+% an author, or a copy of the 'editor' field otherwise. 'indextitle'
+% is the 'indextitle' field, if defined in the bib file, or a copy
+% of the 'title' field otherwise.
+%
+% The mechanism works like this: the \indexnames and \indexfield
+% fields tell biblatex which data to add to the index, the indexing
+% directives tell it how to index the data.
+%
+% The default settings should be fine in most cases. As an example,
+% we will modify them here such that author, editors, translators,
+% and commentators in the bibliography are indexed:
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{bibindex}{%
+ \ifbibindex
+ {\indexnames{author}%
+ \indexnames{editor}%
+ \indexnames{translator}%
+ \indexnames{commentator}%
+ \indexfield{indextitle}}
+ {}}
+%
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Indexing with the \texttt{index} package}
+
+% We add the contents of the entire bib file to the bibliography.
+% Note that \nocite does not add anything to the index on its own.
+\nocite{*}
+
+% We cite a few items. These citations will be added to the index.
+\cite{piccato,gaonkar,malinowski,coleridge,gerhardt,cicero}
+
+% We also add an explicit index entry.
+\index{Example entry}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% We print the printbibliography...
+\printbibliography
+% ...and the indexes
+\raggedright
+\printindex % the general index
+\printindex[names] % the name index
+\printindex[titles] % the title index
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..de66737952
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6bdff2492f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5be1df91f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/22-indexing-subentry.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates indexing with the 'imakeidx' package.
+% This file is processed as follows:
+%
+% latex file
+% bibtex/biber file
+% latex file
+% latex file
+%
+% Note that the file name suffix may be omitted. It's 'latex file' and not
+% 'latex file.tex'. Also note that '-t <file>' is optional.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+%
+% The 'imakeidx' package provides advanced indexing facilities with support for
+% multiple indexes. Unlike the 'index' package, 'imakeidx' does not generate
+% "self-protecting" index entries. So we need to protect control sequences in
+% indexing fields from expansion. For an example see the 'knuth:ct:a' entry in
+% biblatex-examples.bib.
+%
+\usepackage{imakeidx}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+%
+% We set the 'indexing' package option and use the 'authortitle'
+% style in this example.
+%
+\usepackage[indexing=cite,style=authortitle,autolang=hyphen,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+%
+% We want two indexes: an index of names with title subentries, an index of
+% titles organized by year. They are defined by way of \makeindex, see the
+% documentation of the 'imakeidx' package for details.
+%
+\makeindex[name=name-title,title={Name and Title Index}]
+\makeindex[name=year-title,title={Year and Title Index}]
+%
+% A 'name:title' indexing bibmacro can be found in biblatex.def. It takes the same
+% arguments as the 'index:name' bibmacro. Note that the title fields are accessed
+% inside the name indexing directive. So we have to test for missing titles.
+%
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{biblatex_legacy}
+ {\DeclareIndexNameFormat{name:title}{%
+ \iffieldundef{title}
+ {\usebibmacro{index:name}{\index[name-title]}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}
+ {\usebibmacro{index:name:title}{\index[name-title]}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}}
+ {\DeclareIndexNameFormat{name:title}{%
+ \iffieldundef{title}
+ {\usebibmacro{index:name}{\index[name-title]}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartprefix}
+ {\namepartsuffix}}
+ {\usebibmacro{index:name:title}{\index[name-title]}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartprefix}
+ {\namepartsuffix}}}}
+\makeatother
+%
+% Auxiliary indexing macros in biblatex.def can be used to define additional
+% indexing directives with subentries. The following directive creates entries
+% for the year-title index.
+%
+\DeclareIndexFieldFormat{with:year}{%
+ \iffieldundef{year}
+ {\usebibmacro{index:entry}{\index[year-title]}{%
+ \mkbibindexentry{0}{Not dated}%
+ \subentryoperator%
+ \mkbibindexfield{\thefield{indexsorttitle}}{\emph{#1}}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{index:entry}{\index[year-title]}{%
+ \thefield{year}\subentryoperator%
+ \mkbibindexfield{\thefield{indexsorttitle}}{\emph{#1}}}}}
+%
+% We redefine the 'citeindex' bibmacro to use the new indexing directives.
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{citeindex}{%
+ \ifciteindex
+ {\indexnames[name:title]{labelname}%
+ \indexfield[with:year]{indextitle}}
+ {}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Indexing with the \texttt{imakeidx} package}
+
+% We cite a few items. These citations will be added to the indexes.
+\cite{knuth:ct,knuth:ct:a,knuth:ct:c,knuth:ct:d}
+\cite{aristotle:anima,aristotle:poetics,aristotle:physics,aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% We print the printbibliography...
+\printbibliography
+% ...and the indexes
+\raggedright
+\printindex[name-title] % the name-title index
+\printindex[year-title] % the year-title index
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1518d09ac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..59584f7cc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c673ffb250
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/30-style-numeric.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'numeric' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=numeric,subentry,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{numeric} style}
+
+This style prints numeric citations in square brackets. It is
+similar to the standard bibliographic facilities provided by LaTeX
+and to the \texttt{plain.bst} style of legacy BibTeX.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{subentry} option}
+
+The option \texttt{subentry} affects the handling of citations
+referring to members of a reference set. If this option is enabled,
+such citations get an extra letter which identifies the member
+(it is also printed in the bibliography):
+\cite{glashow,yoon,salam,aksin,companion}.
+
+This option is disabled by default, but it has been enabled
+in this example. If disabled, citations referring to a set member
+will point to the entire set, i.e., the above citations would
+come out as
+\cite{stdmodel,set,stdmodel,set,companion}.
+
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{companion}
+
+\cite[59]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][59--63]{companion}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+With the numeric style, \cmd{parencite} and \cmd{cite}
+behave the exactly the same.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][59--63]{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+% The \textcite command is intended for citations integrated in the
+% flow of text, replacing the subject of the sentence.
+
+\textcite{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][59--63]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{supercite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{companion}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% By default, the \autocite command works like \parencite.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+% By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
+
+\cite{companion,augustine,bertram,cotton,hammond,massa,murray}
+
+
+% The list of references
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ee3bc0b805
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a75a9dbcf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..95ac00b5b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'numeric-comp' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=numeric-comp,subentry,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{numeric-comp} style}
+
+This style is similar to \texttt{numeric} except that a list of
+multiple citations is sorted and any sequence of more than two
+consecutive numbers is formatted as a range. This style will
+implicitly enable the \texttt{sortcites} package option at load
+time.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{subentry} option}
+
+The option \texttt{subentry} affects the handling of citations
+referring to members of a reference set. If this option is enabled,
+such citations get an extra letter which identifies the member
+(it is also printed in the bibliography):
+\cite{glashow,yoon,salam,aksin,companion}.
+
+This option is disabled by default, but it has been enabled
+in this example. If disabled, citations referring to a set member
+will point to the entire set, i.e., the above citations would
+come out as
+\cite{stdmodel,set,stdmodel,set,companion}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{bertram,augustine}
+
+\cite{murray,bertram,augustine,companion,cotton}
+
+\cite{augustine,bertram,cotton,hammond,set,massa,murray}
+
+\cite{bertram,companion,cotton,augustine,massa,set,hammond,murray,stdmodel}
+
+\cite{yoon,weinberg}
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations with \cmd{supercite}}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{bertram,augustine}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{murray,bertram,augustine,companion,cotton}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{augustine,bertram,cotton,hammond,set,massa,murray}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{bertram,companion,cotton,augustine,massa,set,hammond,murray,stdmodel}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{yoon,weinberg}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..13d036152b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..705363bb8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..269b52f786
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'numeric-verb' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=numeric-verb,subentry,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{numeric-verb} style}
+
+This style is similar to \texttt{numeric} except that a list of
+multiple citations is printed in a slightly more verbose format.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{subentry} option}
+
+The option \texttt{subentry} affects the handling of citations
+referring to members of a reference set. If this option is enabled,
+such citations get an extra letter which identifies the member
+(it is also printed in the bibliography):
+\cite{glashow,yoon,salam,aksin,companion}.
+
+This option is disabled by default, but it has been enabled
+in this example. If disabled, citations referring to a set member
+will point to the entire set, i.e., the above citations would
+come out as
+\cite{stdmodel,set,stdmodel,set,companion}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{hammond,massa,augustine,cotton,set,murray,bertram,stdmodel}
+
+\cite{yoon,salam}
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations with \cmd{supercite}}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{hammond,massa,augustine,cotton,set,murray,bertram,stdmodel}
+
+This is just filler text.\supercite{yoon,salam}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ef95075a70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..de2ff32d03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..42b4f8c4c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'alphabetic' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=alphabetic,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{alphabetic} style}
+
+This style prints alphabetic citations similar to the
+\texttt{alpha.bst} style of legacy BibTeX. The alphabetic labels
+resemble a compact author-year style to some extent, but the way
+they are employed is similar to a numeric citation scheme.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{companion}
+
+\cite[59]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][59--63]{companion}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+% With this style, the \parencite command is similar to \cite at
+% first glance, but the placement of the prenote argument is
+% different.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][59--63]{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][59--63]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% By default, the \autocite command works like \parencite.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+% By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
+
+\cite{companion,augustine,bertram,cotton,hammond,massa,murray}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% The list of references
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..528ffeb802
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..afc733d0ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1b3e5045ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'alphabetic-verb' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=alphabetic-verb,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{alphabetic-verb} style}
+
+This style is similar to \texttt{alphabetic} except that a list of
+multiple citations is printed in a slightly more verbose format.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{hammond,massa,augustine,cotton,murray,bertram}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d9061d2a64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a1170adb23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..976306cbc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'alphabetic' style with labels formatted with
+% '\DeclareLabelalphaTemplate'.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=alphabetic,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+
+\DeclareLabelalphaTemplate{
+ \labelelement{
+ \field[final]{shorthand}
+ \field{label}
+ \field[strwidth=3,strside=left,ifnames=1]{labelname}
+ \field[strwidth=1,strside=left]{labelname}
+ }
+ \labelelement{
+ \field[strwidth=2,strside=right]{year}
+ }
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+Filler text \parencite{wassenberg,cicero,companion,kant:kpv,kant:ku,cms,ctan}.
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5e2fcbc438
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4217606fd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..678efc4fc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authoryear' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\newenvironment{bibsample}
+ {\trivlist\samepage
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}}
+ {\endtrivlist}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authoryear} style}
+
+This style implements the author-year citation scheme.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+Since this style prints the date label after the author/editor in the
+bibliography, there are effectively two dates in the bibliography:
+the full date specification (e.g., \enquote{2001}, \enquote{June
+2006}, \enquote{5th~Jan. 2008}, whose format is controlled by the
+\texttt{date} option) and the date label (e.g., \enquote{2006a},
+whose format is controlled with the \texttt{labeldate} option),
+as found in citations. The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether
+or not date specifications are merged with the date label.
+This option is best explained by example. Note that
+it only affects the bibliography. Citations use the date label only.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe 2000
+\item Doe 2003a
+\item Doe 2003b
+\item Doe 2006a
+\item Doe 2006b
+\item Doe 2017
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=false} strictly separates the date specification
+(following \texttt{date}) from the date label (following \texttt{labeldate}).
+The year will always be printed twice:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher, 2000.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=minimum} omits the date whenever the full date
+and the date label have exactly the same precision (date-time granularity).
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=basic} is similar in concept but more economical.
+It will also omit the date if it differs from the date label only by
+\texttt{extradate}.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=compact} merges all date specifications with the
+date labels. The merged date is printed in \texttt{date} format,
+not \texttt{labeldate}, even if it is printed in the position of
+the date label. The \texttt{issue} field is still treated specially:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=maximum} strives for maximum compactness.
+Like \texttt{mergedate=compact} this option merges the date
+into the date label.
+Even the \texttt{issue} field is merged with the date label:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (Fall 2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3, pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=true} is an alias for \texttt{mergedate=compact}.
+This is the default setting.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{companion}
+
+\cite[59]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][59--63]{companion}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][]{companion}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][59--63]{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{companion} show that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+% Even though the author-year scheme is usually employed in
+% conjuntion with in-text citations, it works just fine in
+% footnotes, too.
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59]{companion}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][]{companion}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][59--63]{companion}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][59--63]{companion} show that this is just filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% By default, the \autocite command works like \parencite.
+% The starred version works like \parencite*.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
+
+\citeauthor{companion} show that this is just filler
+text \autocite*{companion}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+% By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
+
+\cite{knuth:ct:c,aristotle:physics,knuth:ct:b,aristotle:poetics,aristotle:rhetoric,knuth:ct:d}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+% If an entry in the bib file includes a 'shorthand' field, the
+% shorthand replaces the regular author-title citation.
+
+\cite{kant:kpv,kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% The list of shorthands.
+
+\printshorthands
+
+% The list of references. Note that the year is printed after the
+% author or editor and that recurring author and editor names are
+% replaced by a dash unless the entry is the first one on the
+% current page or double page spread (depending on the setting of
+% the 'pagetracker' package option). This style will implicitly set
+% 'pagetracker=spread' at load time.
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2da51f7740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0b5da8cf75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..20051be64e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authoryear-ibid' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear-ibid,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\newenvironment{bibsample}
+ {\trivlist\samepage
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}}
+ {\endtrivlist}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authoryear-ibid} style}
+
+This citation style is a variant of the \texttt{authoryear} style.
+Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the abbreviation
+`ibidem' unless the citation is the first one on the current page or
+double page spread (depending on the setting of the
+\texttt{pagetracker} package option). This style is intended for
+citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[378]{sigfridsson}
+\cite[378]{sigfridsson}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out as
+\begin{quote}
+Sigfridsson and Ryde 1998, p.~378
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman 2002, p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Sigfridsson and Ryde 1998, p.~378
+
+ibid., p.~378
+
+Worman 2002, p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+Since this style prints the date label after the author/editor in the
+bibliography, there are effectively two dates in the bibliography:
+the full date specification (e.g., \enquote{2001}, \enquote{June
+2006}, \enquote{5th~Jan. 2008}, whose format is controlled by the
+\texttt{date} option) and the date label (e.g., \enquote{2006a},
+whose format is controlled with the \texttt{labeldate} option),
+as found in citations. The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether
+or not date specifications are merged with the date label.
+This option is best explained by example. Note that
+it only affects the bibliography. Citations use the date label only.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe 2000
+\item Doe 2003a
+\item Doe 2003b
+\item Doe 2006a
+\item Doe 2006b
+\item Doe 2017
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=false} strictly separates the date specification
+(following \texttt{date}) from the date label (following \texttt{labeldate}).
+The year will always be printed twice:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher, 2000.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=minimum} omits the date whenever the full date
+and the date label have exactly the same precision (date-time granularity).
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=basic} is similar in concept but more economical.
+It will also omit the date if it differs from the date label only by
+\texttt{extradate}.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=compact} merges all date specifications with the
+date labels. The merged date is printed in \texttt{date} format,
+not \texttt{labeldate}, even if it is printed in the position of
+the date label. The \texttt{issue} field is still treated specially:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=maximum} strives for maximum compactness.
+Like \texttt{mergedate=compact} this option merges the date
+into the date label.
+Even the \texttt{issue} field is merged with the date label:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (Fall 2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3, pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=true} is an alias for \texttt{mergedate=compact}.
+This is the default setting.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
+% Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
+% abbreviation 'ibidem'...
+This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
+\clearpage
+% ... unless the citation is the first one on the current page
+% or double page spread (depending on the setting of the
+% 'pagetracker' package option).
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{companion}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{companion}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7f1d6efa79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f6f2e0ba51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c4f6b52c51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authoryear-comp' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear-comp,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\newenvironment{bibsample}
+ {\trivlist\samepage
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}}
+ {\endtrivlist}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authoryear-comp} style}
+
+This style is a compact version of the \texttt{authoryear} style
+which prints the author only once if subsequent references passed to
+a single citation command share the same author. If they share the
+same year as well, the year is also printed only once. This style
+will implicitly enable the \texttt{sortcites} package option at load
+time.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+Since this style prints the date label after the author/editor in the
+bibliography, there are effectively two dates in the bibliography:
+the full date specification (e.g., \enquote{2001}, \enquote{June
+2006}, \enquote{5th~Jan. 2008}, whose format is controlled by the
+\texttt{date} option) and the date label (e.g., \enquote{2006a},
+whose format is controlled with the \texttt{labeldate} option),
+as found in citations. The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether
+or not date specifications are merged with the date label.
+This option is best explained by example. Note that
+it only affects the bibliography. Citations use the date label only.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe 2000
+\item Doe 2003a
+\item Doe 2003b
+\item Doe 2006a
+\item Doe 2006b
+\item Doe 2017
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=false} strictly separates the date specification
+(following \texttt{date}) from the date label (following \texttt{labeldate}).
+The year will always be printed twice:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher, 2000.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=minimum} omits the date whenever the full date
+and the date label have exactly the same precision (date-time granularity).
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=basic} is similar in concept but more economical.
+It will also omit the date if it differs from the date label only by
+\texttt{extradate}.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=compact} merges all date specifications with the
+date labels. The merged date is printed in \texttt{date} format,
+not \texttt{labeldate}, even if it is printed in the position of
+the date label. The \texttt{issue} field is still treated specially:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=maximum} strives for maximum compactness.
+Like \texttt{mergedate=compact} this option merges the date
+into the date label.
+Even the \texttt{issue} field is merged with the date label:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (Fall 2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3, pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=true} is an alias for \texttt{mergedate=compact}.
+This is the default setting.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{knuth:ct:c,aristotle:physics,knuth:ct:b,aristotle:poetics,aristotle:rhetoric,knuth:ct:d}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9446a66a58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6c76c94667
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eee0d3caf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authoryear-icomp' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear-icomp,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\newenvironment{bibsample}
+ {\trivlist\samepage
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}}
+ {\endtrivlist}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authoryear-icomp} style}
+
+This style combines the features of \texttt{authoryear-ibid} and
+\texttt{authoryear-comp}. It will implicitly enable the
+\texttt{sortcites} package option at load time. This style is
+intended for citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[378]{sigfridsson}
+\cite[378]{sigfridsson}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out as
+\begin{quote}
+Sigfridsson and Ryde 1998, p.~378
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman 2002, p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Sigfridsson and Ryde 1998, p.~378
+
+ibid., p.~378
+
+Worman 2002, p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+Since this style prints the date label after the author/editor in the
+bibliography, there are effectively two dates in the bibliography:
+the full date specification (e.g., \enquote{2001}, \enquote{June
+2006}, \enquote{5th~Jan. 2008}, whose format is controlled by the
+\texttt{date} option) and the date label (e.g., \enquote{2006a},
+whose format is controlled with the \texttt{labeldate} option),
+as found in citations. The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether
+or not date specifications are merged with the date label.
+This option is best explained by example. Note that
+it only affects the bibliography. Citations use the date label only.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe 2000
+\item Doe 2003a
+\item Doe 2003b
+\item Doe 2006a
+\item Doe 2006b
+\item Doe 2017
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=false} strictly separates the date specification
+(following \texttt{date}) from the date label (following \texttt{labeldate}).
+The year will always be printed twice:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher, 2000.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=minimum} omits the date whenever the full date
+and the date label have exactly the same precision (date-time granularity).
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher, 2003.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=basic} is similar in concept but more economical.
+It will also omit the date if it differs from the date label only by
+\texttt{extradate}.
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6
+(June~2006), pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall~2006), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (2017). \emph{Webpage}. 7th Aug. 2017.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=compact} merges all date specifications with the
+date labels. The merged date is printed in \texttt{date} format,
+not \texttt{labeldate}, even if it is printed in the position of
+the date label. The \texttt{issue} field is still treated specially:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3
+(Fall), pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=maximum} strives for maximum compactness.
+Like \texttt{mergedate=compact} this option merges the date
+into the date label.
+Even the \texttt{issue} field is merged with the date label:
+
+\begin{bibsample}
+\item Doe, John (2000). \emph{Book~1}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003a). \emph{Book~2}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (2003b). \emph{Book~3}. Location: Publisher.
+\item Doe, John (June 2006a). \enquote{Article~1}. In: \emph{Monthly Journal} 25.6, pp.~70--85.
+\item Doe, John (Fall 2006b). \enquote{Article~2}. In: \emph{Quarterly Journal} 14.3, pp.~5--25.
+\item Doe, John (7th Aug. 2017).\emph{Webpage}.
+\end{bibsample}
+
+\texttt{mergedate=true} is an alias for \texttt{mergedate=compact}.
+This is the default setting.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics,aristotle:rhetoric,}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
+\clearpage
+This is just filler text.\footcite{knuth:ct:c,knuth:ct:b,knuth:ct:d}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{companion}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{companion}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..899937934f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eee3ef8367
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..618980e762
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authortitle' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle} style}
+
+This style prints author-title citations. If an entry in the
+database file includes a \texttt{shorttitle} field, the short
+title is used instead of the \texttt{title} field.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[see][]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[see][59--63]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[see][59--63]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[see][]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[see][59--63]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][59--63]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][59--63]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% By default, the \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+% By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+% If an entry in the bib file includes a 'shorthand' field, the
+% shorthand replaces the regular author-title citation.
+
+\cite{kant:kpv,kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% The list of shorthands.
+
+\printshorthands
+
+% The list of references. Note that the year is printed after the
+% author or editor and that recurring author and editor names are
+% replaced by a dash unless the entry is the first one on the
+% current page or double page spread (depending on the setting of
+% the 'pagetracker' package option). This style will implicitly set
+% 'pagetracker=true' at load time.
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..beb9080921
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..392f6a47e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..83d2fa5032
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-ibid' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-ibid,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-ibid} style}
+
+This citation style is a variant of the \texttt{authortitle} style.
+Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the abbreviation
+`ibidem' unless the citation is the first one on the current page or
+double page spread (depending on the setting of the
+\texttt{pagetracker} package option). This style is intended for
+citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out as
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~12
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+% Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
+% abbreviation 'ibidem'...
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+\clearpage
+% ... unless the citation is the first one on the current page
+% or double page spread (depending on the setting of the
+% 'pagetracker' package option).
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..30d38b1901
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..23a8af4319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4d05b5001f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-comp' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-comp,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-comp} style}
+
+This style is a compact version of the \texttt{authortitle} style
+which prints the author only once if subsequent references passed to
+a single citation command share the same author. This style will
+implicitly enable the \texttt{sortcites} package option at load
+time.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,averroes/bland,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..764fa67f72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..162b15f46d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a16a420db1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-icomp' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-icomp,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-icomp} style}
+
+This style combines the features of \texttt{authortitle-ibid} and
+\texttt{authortitle-comp}. It will implicitly enable the
+\texttt{sortcites} package option at load time. This style is
+intended for citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out as
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~12
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric,averroes/bland,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5136e300d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..46b622c6bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fa02dae29c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-terse' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-terse,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-terse} style}
+
+This style implements a terse author-title citation scheme suitable
+for both in-text citations and citations given in footnotes. It
+differs form the regular \texttt{authortitle} style in that the
+title is only printed if the bibliography contains more than one
+work by the respective author or editor.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{averroes/bland}
+
+\cite{aristotle:physics}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{averroes/bland}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[see][59--63]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% By default, the \autocite command works like \parencite.
+% The starred version works like \parencite*.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \autocite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+% By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,averroes/bland,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5edf0c5172
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e20da20c5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9a17acb78b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-tcomp' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-tcomp,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-tcomp} style}
+
+This style essentially combines \texttt{authortitle-terse} and
+\texttt{authortitle-comp}. It will implicitly enable the
+\texttt{sortcites} package option at load time.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{averroes/bland}
+
+\cite{aristotle:physics}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,averroes/bland,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6e652a83b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0428c21164
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2e8230cbe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-ticomp' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-ticomp,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings.
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-ticomp} style}
+
+This style essentially combines \texttt{authortitle-terse} and
+\texttt{authortitle-icomp}. It will implicitly enable the
+\texttt{sortcites} package option at load time.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out as
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~12
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{averroes/bland}
+
+\cite{aristotle:physics}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,averroes/bland,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\clearpage
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2dbfd5a6fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2db844dfa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0a14791a72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/70-style-verbose.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'verbose' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=verbose,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{verbose} style}
+
+This citation style prints a verbose citation similar to the full
+bibliography entry when an item is cited for the first time. All
+subsequent citations will then use a shorter author-title format.
+This style is intended for citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{citepages} option}
+
+Use this option to fine-tune the formatting of the \texttt{pages}
+and \texttt{pagetotal} fields in verbose citations. When an entry
+with a \texttt{pages} field is cited for the first time and the
+\texttt{postnote} is a page number or a page range, the citation
+will end with two page specifications:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+In this example, \enquote{125} is the \texttt{postnote} and
+\enquote{100--150} is the \texttt{pages} field (there are similar
+issues with the \texttt{pagetotal} field). This may be confusing to
+the reader. The \texttt{citepages} option controls how to deal with
+these fields in this case. The option works as follows, given these
+citations as an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e., the style will
+print both the \texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} and the
+\texttt{postnote}. This is the default setting:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=suppress} unconditionally suppresses the
+\texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} fields in citations,
+regardless of the \texttt{postnote}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book.}
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=omit} suppresses the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} in the third case only. They are still printed if
+there is no \texttt{postnote} or if the \texttt{postnote} is not a
+number or range:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=separate} separates the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} from the \texttt{postnote} in the third case:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, esp. p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The string \enquote{especially} in the third case is the bibliography
+string \texttt{thiscite}, which may be redefined.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+% The initial citation of an entry includes all the data.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+% Subsequent citations use a more compact format.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% on the first citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
+% All subsequent citations will then use the shorthand.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[24]{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--63]{kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% The \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{averroes/bland}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Since all bibliographic data is provided on the first citation,
+% this style may be used without a list of references and
+% shorthands. Of course these lists may still be printed if desired.
+
+\printshorthands
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..752d23fdb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d3915cbc01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ca30835108
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'verbose-ibid' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=verbose-ibid,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{verbose-ibid} style}
+
+This citation style is a slightly more compact variant of the
+\texttt{verbose} style. Immediately repeated citations are replaced
+by the abbreviation `ibidem' unless the citation is the first one on
+the current page or double page spread (depending on the setting of
+the \texttt{pagetracker} package option). This style is also
+intended for citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out -- shortened -- as
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The shortened result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~12
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+Use this option to fine-tune the formatting of the \texttt{pages}
+and \texttt{pagetotal} fields in verbose citations. When an entry
+with a \texttt{pages} field is cited for the first time and the
+\texttt{postnote} is a page number or a page range, the citation
+will end with two page specifications:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+In this example, \enquote{125} is the \texttt{postnote} and
+\enquote{100--150} is the \texttt{pages} field (there are similar
+issues with the \texttt{pagetotal} field). This may be confusing to
+the reader. The \texttt{citepages} option controls how to deal with
+these fields in this case. The option works as follows, given these
+citations as an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e., the style will
+print both the \texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} and the
+\texttt{postnote}. This is the default setting:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=suppress} unconditionally suppresses the
+\texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} fields in citations,
+regardless of the \texttt{postnote}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book.}
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=omit} suppresses the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} in the third case only. They are still printed if
+there is no \texttt{postnote} or if the \texttt{postnote} is not a
+number or range:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=separate} separates the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} from the \texttt{postnote} in the third case:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, esp. p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The string \enquote{especially} in the third case is the bibliography
+string \texttt{thiscite}, which may be redefined.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+% The initial citation of an entry includes all the data.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+% Subsequent citations use a more compact format.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+% Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
+% abbreviation `ibidem'...
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+\clearpage
+% ... unless the citation is the first one on the current page
+% or double page spread (depending on the setting of the
+% `pagetracker' package option).
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% If the `shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% on the first citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
+% All subsequent citations will then use the shorthand.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[24]{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--63]{kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% The \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{averroes/bland}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Since all bibliographic data is provided on the first citation,
+% this style may be used without a list of references and
+% shorthands. Of course these lists may still be printed if desired.
+
+\printshorthands
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..47165f4c3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6713221484
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..acc5f49afe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'verbose-note' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=verbose-note,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{verbose-note} style}
+
+This citation style is similar to \texttt{verbose} in that it prints
+a verbose citation similar to the full bibliography entry when an
+item is cited for the first time. All subsequent citations are
+pointers to the footnote containing the verbose citation. This style
+is exclusively intended for citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{pageref} option}
+
+By default, this style does not add a page reference to the footnote
+pointers, i.e., they are rendered as `see note~3'. If you want such
+references to be rendered as `see note~3, page~5' instead, set the
+package option \texttt{pageref=true} or simply \texttt{pageref} in
+the preamble. This will add the page number to the footnote pointer
+whenever the footnote to which the pointer refers is located on a
+different page or page spread (depending on the setting of the
+\texttt{pagetracker} option). The default setting is
+\texttt{pageref=false}.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{citepages} option}
+
+Use this option to fine-tune the formatting of the \texttt{pages}
+and \texttt{pagetotal} fields in verbose citations. When an entry
+with a \texttt{pages} field is cited for the first time and the
+\texttt{postnote} is a page number or a page range, the citation
+will end with two page specifications:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+In this example, \enquote{125} is the \texttt{postnote} and
+\enquote{100--150} is the \texttt{pages} field (there are similar
+issues with the \texttt{pagetotal} field). This may be confusing to
+the reader. The \texttt{citepages} option controls how to deal with
+these fields in this case. The option works as follows, given these
+citations as an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e., the style will
+print both the \texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} and the
+\texttt{postnote}. This is the default setting:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=suppress} unconditionally suppresses the
+\texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} fields in citations,
+regardless of the \texttt{postnote}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book.}
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=omit} suppresses the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} in the third case only. They are still printed if
+there is no \texttt{postnote} or if the \texttt{postnote} is not a
+number or range:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=separate} separates the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} from the \texttt{postnote} in the third case:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, esp. p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The string \enquote{especially} in the third case is the bibliography
+string \texttt{thiscite}, which may be redefined.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+% The initial citation of an entry includes all the data.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text \footcite{averroes/bland}.
+% Subsequent citations are pointers to the initial citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+% If there is only one work by an author in the bibliography, the
+% title is omitted from the pointer.
+This is just filler text \footcite{averroes/bland}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% on the first citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
+% All subsequent citations will then use the shorthand.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[24]{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--63]{kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% The \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{averroes/bland}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Since all bibliographic data is provided on the first citation,
+% this style may be used without a list of references and
+% shorthands. Of course these lists may still be printed if desired.
+
+\printshorthands
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bd9efae97f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e9986d3105
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8d2a884254
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'verbose-inote' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=verbose-inote,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{verbose-inote} style}
+
+This citation style is a slightly more compact variant of the
+\texttt{verbose-note} style. Immediately repeated citations are
+replaced by the abbreviation `ibidem' unless the citation is the
+first one on the current page or double page spread. This style is
+exclusively intended for citations given in footnotes.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{pageref} option}
+
+By default, this style does not add a page reference to the footnote
+pointers, i.e., they are rendered as `see note~3'. If you want such
+references to be rendered as `see note~3, page~5' instead, set the
+package option \texttt{pageref=true} or simply \texttt{pageref} in
+the preamble. This will add the page number to the footnote pointer
+whenever the footnote to which the pointer refers is located on a
+different page or page spread (depending on the setting of the
+\texttt{pagetracker} option). The default setting is
+\texttt{pageref=false}.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out -- shortened -- as
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The shortened result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~12
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+Use this option to fine-tune the formatting of the \texttt{pages}
+and \texttt{pagetotal} fields in verbose citations. When an entry
+with a \texttt{pages} field is cited for the first time and the
+\texttt{postnote} is a page number or a page range, the citation
+will end with two page specifications:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+In this example, \enquote{125} is the \texttt{postnote} and
+\enquote{100--150} is the \texttt{pages} field (there are similar
+issues with the \texttt{pagetotal} field). This may be confusing to
+the reader. The \texttt{citepages} option controls how to deal with
+these fields in this case. The option works as follows, given these
+citations as an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e., the style will
+print both the \texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} and the
+\texttt{postnote}. This is the default setting:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=suppress} unconditionally suppresses the
+\texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} fields in citations,
+regardless of the \texttt{postnote}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book.}
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=omit} suppresses the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} in the third case only. They are still printed if
+there is no \texttt{postnote} or if the \texttt{postnote} is not a
+number or range:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=separate} separates the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} from the \texttt{postnote} in the third case:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, esp. p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The string \enquote{especially} in the third case is the bibliography
+string \texttt{thiscite}, which may be redefined.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+% The initial citation of an entry includes all the data.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text \footcite{averroes/bland}.
+% Subsequent citations are pointers to the initial citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+% If there is only one work by an author in the bibliography, the
+% title is omitted from the pointer.
+This is just filler text \footcite{averroes/bland}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
+% abbreviation 'ibidem'...
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+\clearpage
+% ... unless the citation is the first one on the current page
+% or double page spread (depending on the setting of the
+% 'pagetracker' package option).
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% on the first citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
+% All subsequent citations will then use the shorthand instead of
+% a reference to a previous footnote.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[24]{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--63]{kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% The \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{averroes/bland}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Since all bibliographic data is provided on the first citation,
+% this style may be used without a list of references and
+% shorthands. Of course these lists may still be printed if desired.
+
+\printshorthands
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1655bef72e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9dda0de27e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fe593b6c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,401 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'verbose-trad1' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[german,american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=verbose-trad1,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{tabularx}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand*{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newcolumntype{H}{>{\bfseries}l}
+\newcolumntype{C}{>{\ttfamily}c}
+\newcolumntype{V}{>{\ttfamily}l}
+\newenvironment*{inlinetable}
+ {\trivlist\footnotesize\item}
+ {\endtrivlist}
+\newcommand*{\code}[1]{%
+ \detokenize\expandafter{\string#1}}
+\newenvironment*{pseudofootnotes}
+ {\list\labelenumi{%
+ \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \def\labelenumi{\theenumi}%
+ \usecounter{enumi}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.75em}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \citereset
+ \footnotesize
+ \def\footcite##1{\item\Cite{##1}.}%
+ \def\footnote##1{\item##1}}
+ {\endlist}
+\newenvironment*{pseudofootnotes*}
+ {\pseudofootnotes
+ \def\footnote##1{\item##1\mancite}}
+ {\endpseudofootnotes}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{verbose-trad1} style}
+
+This is a traditional citation style which uses scholarly
+abbreviations like \emph{ibidem}, \emph{idem}, \emph{opere citato},
+and \emph{loco citato} in a special way to replace recurrent
+authors, titles, and page ranges across separate citation commands.
+This style is best explained by example.
+
+\subsection*{Outline}
+
+Let's assume a \texttt{bib} file with the following entries:
+
+\begin{inlinetable}
+\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{@{}CX@{}}
+\toprule
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{Entry Key} &
+\multicolumn{1}{H}{Entry Data} \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(l){2-2}
+a1 & Author A, Title 1 \\
+a2 & Author A, Title 2 \\
+a3 & Author A, Title 3 \\
+b1 & Author B, Title 1 \\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabularx}
+\end{inlinetable}
+%
+Here's an example of how this citation scheme works:
+
+\begin{inlinetable}
+\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{@{}VlX@{}}
+\toprule
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{Command} &
+\multicolumn{1}{H}{Conditions} &
+\multicolumn{1}{H}{Citation} \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite{a1}} & Initial reference & Verbose citation \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite{b1}} & Initial reference & Verbose citation \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite[26]{a1}} & Author changed & Author, \emph{op.~cit.}, page \\
+ & + Title is last title by \emph{this} author \\
+ & + Page is new/different from last page cited \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite[59]{b1}} & Author changed & Author, \emph{op.~cit.}, page \\
+ & + Title is last title by \emph{this} author \\
+ & + Page is new/different from last page cited \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite[26]{a1}} & Author changed & Author, \emph{loc.~cit.} \\
+ & + Title is last title by \emph{this} author \\
+ & + Page is last page cited from \emph{this} work \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite[59]{b1}} & Author changed & Author, \emph{loc.~cit.} \\
+ & + Title is last title by \emph{this} author \\
+ & + Page is last page cited from \emph{this} work \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite{a2}} & Initial reference & Verbose citation \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite{b1}} & Author changed & Author, \emph{op.~cit.} \\
+ & + Title is last title by \emph{this} author \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite{a1}} & Author changed & Author, Title \\
+ & + Title different from last title by \emph{this} author \\
+ & + Title has been cited before \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite[55]{a2}} & Same author & \emph{idem}, Title, page \\
+ & + Title different from last title by \emph{this} author \\
+ & + Title has been cited before \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite[25]{a2}} & Same author and title & \emph{ibidem}, page \\
+ & + Page is different from last page cited \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(l){3-3}
+\code{\cite[25]{a2}} & Same author and title and page
+ & \emph{ibidem}, page \\
+\code{\cite[25]{a2}} & (with option \texttt{ibidpage=true})
+ & \emph{ibidem} \\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabularx}
+\end{inlinetable}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out -- shortened -- as
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The shortened result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~12
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+A case related to the definition of \emph{ibidem} is the scope of
+the \emph{ibidem} and \emph{idem} replacements. By default, this
+style will only use such abbreviations if the respective citations
+are given in the same footnote or in consecutive footnotes. The
+point of this restriction is also to avoid potentially ambiguous
+citations. Here's an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footnote{Averroes touches upon this issue in his \emph{Epistle
+ on the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+This could be rendered as follows:
+
+\begin{pseudofootnotes}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footnote{Averroes touches upon this issue in his \emph{Epistle on
+the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{pseudofootnotes}
+%
+What does the \emph{ibidem} in the last footnote refer to? The last
+formal citation, as given in the first and the second footnote
+(Aristotle), or the informal reference in the third one (Averroes)?
+Too avoid such citations, this style will only use \emph{ibidem} and
+\emph{idem} replacements if the respective citations are given in
+the same footnote or in consecutive footnotes:
+
+\begin{pseudofootnotes*}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footnote{Averroes touches upon this issue in his \emph{Epistle on
+the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{pseudofootnotes*}
+%
+Depending on your writing and citing habits, however, you may prefer
+the less strict \emph{ibidem} and \emph{idem} handling. You can
+force that by setting the package option \texttt{strict=false} in
+the preamble. It is still possible to mark a manually inserted
+discursive citation with \cmd{mancite} when required:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footnote{\mancite Averroes touches upon this issue in his
+ \emph{Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+This will suppress the \emph{ibidem} in the last footnote.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{citepages} option}
+
+Use this option to fine-tune the formatting of the \texttt{pages}
+and \texttt{pagetotal} fields in verbose citations. When an entry
+with a \texttt{pages} field is cited for the first time and the
+\texttt{postnote} is a page number or a page range, the citation
+will end with two page specifications:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+In this example, \enquote{125} is the \texttt{postnote} and
+\enquote{100--150} is the \texttt{pages} field (there are similar
+issues with the \texttt{pagetotal} field). This may be confusing to
+the reader. The \texttt{citepages} option controls how to deal with
+these fields in this case. The option works as follows, given these
+citations as an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e., the style will
+print both the \texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} and the
+\texttt{postnote}. This is the default setting:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=suppress} unconditionally suppresses the
+\texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} fields in citations,
+regardless of the \texttt{postnote}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book.}
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=omit} suppresses the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} in the third case only. They are still printed if
+there is no \texttt{postnote} or if the \texttt{postnote} is not a
+number or range:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=separate} separates the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} from the \texttt{postnote} in the third case:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, esp. p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The string \enquote{especially} in the third case is the bibliography
+string \texttt{thiscite}, which may be redefined.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Hints and caveats}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+German users should note that the scholarly abbreviations typically
+used in German do not make a clear distinction between
+\emph{op.~cit.} and \emph{loc.~cit.} Both are rendered as
+\emph{a.a.O.}, possibly causing some citations to be misleading. It
+may be preferable to use the \texttt{verbose-trad2} style in German
+documents. If you really want to use \texttt{verbose-trad1}, use the
+Latin keywords. This is accomplished by putting the following in the
+preamble or the configuration file:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+ idem = {idem},
+ idemsm = {idem},
+ idemsf = {eadem},
+ idemsn = {idem},
+ idempm = {eidem},
+ idempf = {eaedem},
+ idempn = {eadem},
+ idempp = {eidem},
+ ibidem = {ibid\adddot},
+ opcit = {op\adddotspace cit\adddot},
+ loccit = {loc\adddotspace cit\adddot},
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+Now let's go over the previous examples again, using real
+bibliography entries this time.
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[26]{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--61]{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[26]{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--61]{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{aristotle:physics}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[25]{aristotle:physics}
+% ibidpage=true would suppress the following page number:
+This is just filler text.\footcite[25]{aristotle:physics}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% on the first citation. All subsequent citations will then use the
+% shorthand.
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[24]{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--63]{kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% The \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{averroes/bland}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Since all bibliographic data is provided on the first citation,
+% this style may be used without a list of references and
+% shorthands. Of course these lists may still be printed if desired.
+
+\printshorthands
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7fb856b7d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..21ab89a7ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f23fa000da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'verbose-trad2' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=verbose-trad2,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newenvironment*{pseudofootnotes}
+ {\list\labelenumi{%
+ \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \def\labelenumi{\theenumi}%
+ \usecounter{enumi}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.75em}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \citereset
+ \footnotesize
+ \def\footcite##1{\item\Cite{##1}.}%
+ \def\footnote##1{\item##1}}
+ {\endlist}
+\newenvironment*{pseudofootnotes*}
+ {\pseudofootnotes
+ \def\footnote##1{\item##1\mancite}}
+ {\endpseudofootnotes}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{verbose-trad2} style}
+
+This is another traditional style which uses scholarly abbreviations
+like \emph{ibidem} and \emph{idem}. Despite its name, the `logic' of
+this style is more closely related to styles like
+\texttt{verbose-ibid} and \texttt{verbose-inote} than to the rather
+special citation scheme implemented in the \texttt{verbose-trad1}
+style.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{ibidpage} option}
+
+The scholarly abbreviation \emph{ibidem} is sometimes taken to mean
+both `same author~+ same title' and `same author~+ same title~+ same
+page' in traditional citation schemes. By default, this is not the
+case with this style because it may lead to ambiguous citations.
+With \texttt{ibidpage=true} a page range postnote will be suppressed
+in an \emph{ibidem} citation if the last citation was to the same
+page range. With \texttt{ibidpage=false} the postnote is not omitted.
+Citations to different page ranges than the previous always produce
+the page ranges with either setting.
+The default setting is \texttt{ibidpage=false}.
+
+Consider the following example citations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{cicero}
+\cite[12]{worman}
+\cite[13]{worman}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+If \texttt{ibidpage} is set to \texttt{true}, the citations
+come out -- shortened -- as
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid.
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+%
+The shortened result for \texttt{ibidpage=false} is
+\begin{quote}
+Cicero, \emph{De natura deorum,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~12
+
+Worman, \emph{The Cast of Character,} p.~12
+
+ibid., p.~13
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+A case related to the definition of \emph{ibidem} is the scope of
+the \emph{ibidem} and \emph{idem} replacements. By default, this
+style will only use such abbreviations if the respective citations
+are given in the same footnote or in consecutive footnotes. The
+point of this restriction is also to avoid potentially ambiguous
+citations. Here's an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footnote{Averroes touches upon this issue in his \emph{Epistle
+ on the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+This could be rendered as follows:
+
+\begin{pseudofootnotes}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footnote{Averroes touches upon this issue in his \emph{Epistle on
+the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{pseudofootnotes}
+%
+What does the \emph{ibidem} in the last footnote refer to? The last
+formal citation, as given in the first and the second footnote
+(Aristotle), or the informal reference in the third one (Averroes)?
+Too avoid such citations, this style will only use \emph{ibidem} and
+\emph{idem} replacements if the respective citations are given in
+the same footnote or in consecutive footnotes:
+
+\begin{pseudofootnotes*}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footnote{Averroes touches upon this issue in his \emph{Epistle on
+the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{pseudofootnotes*}
+%
+Depending on your writing and citing habits, however, you may prefer
+the less strict \emph{ibidem} and \emph{idem} handling. You can
+force that by setting the package option \texttt{strict=false} in
+the preamble. It is still possible to mark a manually inserted
+discursive citation with \cmd{mancite} when required:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footnote{\mancite Averroes touches upon this issue in his
+ \emph{Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction}.}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+This will suppress the \emph{ibidem} in the last footnote.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{citepages} option}
+
+Use this option to fine-tune the formatting of the \texttt{pages}
+and \texttt{pagetotal} fields in verbose citations. When an entry
+with a \texttt{pages} field is cited for the first time and the
+\texttt{postnote} is a page number or a page range, the citation
+will end with two page specifications:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+In this example, \enquote{125} is the \texttt{postnote} and
+\enquote{100--150} is the \texttt{pages} field (there are similar
+issues with the \texttt{pagetotal} field). This may be confusing to
+the reader. The \texttt{citepages} option controls how to deal with
+these fields in this case. The option works as follows, given these
+citations as an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e., the style will
+print both the \texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} and the
+\texttt{postnote}. This is the default setting:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=suppress} unconditionally suppresses the
+\texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} fields in citations,
+regardless of the \texttt{postnote}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book.}
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=omit} suppresses the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} in the third case only. They are still printed if
+there is no \texttt{postnote} or if the \texttt{postnote} is not a
+number or range:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=separate} separates the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} from the \texttt{postnote} in the third case:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, esp. p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The string \enquote{especially} in the third case is the bibliography
+string \texttt{thiscite}, which may be redefined.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+% The initial citation of an entry includes all the data.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{averroes/bland}
+% Subsequent citations use a shorter format.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[26]{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--61]{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
+% Repeated authors are replaced by the abbreviation 'idem':
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{aristotle:physics}
+% Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
+% abbreviation 'ibidem'.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[25]{aristotle:physics}
+% ibidpage=true would suppress the following page number:
+This is just filler text.\footcite[25]{aristotle:physics}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% on the first citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
+% All subsequent citations will then use the shorthand instead of
+% the short author-title format.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[24]{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--63]{kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% The \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{averroes/bland}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:physics}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Since all bibliographic data is provided on the first citation,
+% this style may be used without a list of references and
+% shorthands. Of course these lists may still be printed if desired.
+
+\printshorthands
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..371daf5ad8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0f64efbc22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..02d23b0826
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'verbose-trad3' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=verbose-trad3,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newenvironment*{pseudofootnotes}
+ {\list\labelenumi{%
+ \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \def\labelenumi{\theenumi}%
+ \usecounter{enumi}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.75em}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \citereset
+ \footnotesize
+ \def\footcite##1{\item\Cite{##1}.}%
+ \def\footnote##1{\item##1}}
+ {\endlist}
+\newenvironment*{pseudofootnotes*}
+ {\pseudofootnotes
+ \def\footnote##1{\item##1\mancite}}
+ {\endpseudofootnotes}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{verbose-trad3} style}
+
+This is another traditional style which uses the scholarly
+abbreviations \emph{ibidem} and \emph{op.~cit.} In contrast to
+\texttt{verbose-trad2}, \emph{ibidem} denotes `same author~+ same
+title~+ same page' and \emph{op.~cit.} denotes `same author~+ same
+title' in this style. All other citations are based on the title.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{strict} option}
+
+By default, this style will only use \emph{ibidem} and
+\emph{op.~cit.} if the respective citations are given in the same
+footnote or in consecutive footnotes. The point of this restriction
+is also to avoid potentially ambiguous citations. Here's an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footnote{Aristotle touches upon this issue
+ in his \emph{Rhetoric}.}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+This could be rendered as follows:
+
+\begin{pseudofootnotes}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footnote{Aristotle touches upon this issue in his \emph{Rhetoric}.}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{pseudofootnotes}
+%
+What does the \emph{op.~cit.} in the last footnote refer to? The
+last formal citation, as given in the first and the second footnote
+(\emph{De Anima}), or the informal reference in the third one
+(\emph{Rhetoric})? Too avoid such citations, this style will only
+use abbreviations if the respective citations are given in the same
+footnote or in consecutive footnotes:
+
+\begin{pseudofootnotes*}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\footnote{Aristotle touches upon this issue in his \emph{Rhetoric}.}
+\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{pseudofootnotes*}
+%
+Depending on your writing and citing habits, however, you may prefer
+the less strict \emph{ibidem} and \emph{op.~cit.} handling. You can
+force that by setting the package option \texttt{strict=false} in
+the preamble. It is still possible to mark a manually inserted
+discursive citation with \cmd{mancite} when required:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+...\footnote{\mancite Aristotle touches upon this issue
+ in his \emph{Rhetoric}.}
+...\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+This will suppress the \emph{op.~cit.} in the last footnote.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{citepages} option}
+
+Use this option to fine-tune the formatting of the \texttt{pages}
+and \texttt{pagetotal} fields in verbose citations. When an entry
+with a \texttt{pages} field is cited for the first time and the
+\texttt{postnote} is a page number or a page range, the citation
+will end with two page specifications:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+In this example, \enquote{125} is the \texttt{postnote} and
+\enquote{100--150} is the \texttt{pages} field (there are similar
+issues with the \texttt{pagetotal} field). This may be confusing to
+the reader. The \texttt{citepages} option controls how to deal with
+these fields in this case. The option works as follows, given these
+citations as an example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e., the style will
+print both the \texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} and the
+\texttt{postnote}. This is the default setting:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=suppress} unconditionally suppresses the
+\texttt{pages}\slash \texttt{pagetotal} fields in citations,
+regardless of the \texttt{postnote}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book.}
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=omit} suppresses the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} in the third case only. They are still printed if
+there is no \texttt{postnote} or if the \texttt{postnote} is not a
+number or range:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{citepages=separate} separates the \texttt{pages}\slash
+\texttt{pagetotal} from the \texttt{postnote} in the third case:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+Author. \enquote{Title.} In: \emph{Book,} pp.\,100--150, esp. p.\,125.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The string \enquote{especially} in the third case is the bibliography
+string \texttt{thiscite}, which may be redefined.
+
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{dashed} option}
+
+By default, this style replaces recurrent authors/editors in the
+bibliography by a dash so that items by the same author or editor
+are visually grouped. This feature is controlled by the package
+option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
+preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
+\texttt{dashed=true}.
+
+\subsection*{Hints}
+
+If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
+redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\mkibid}{\emph}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+% The initial citation of an entry includes all the data.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{averroes/bland}
+% Subsequent citations use a shorter format.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[26]{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--61]{averroes/bland}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+% Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
+% abbreviation 'op. cit.'.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[25]{aristotle:anima}
+% Only repeated citations with the same page number
+% are replaced by the abbreviation 'ibidem'.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[25]{aristotle:anima}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% on the first citation.
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
+% All subsequent citations will then use the shorthand instead of
+% the short author-title format.
+This is just filler text.\footcite[24]{kant:kpv}
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59--63]{kant:ku}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+% The \autocite command works like \footcite. Note that
+% the period is moved and placed before the footnote.
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{averroes/bland}.
+This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite[55]{aristotle:anima}.
+This is just filler text \autocite[55]{aristotle:anima}.
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Since all bibliographic data is provided on the first citation,
+% this style may be used without a list of references and
+% shorthands. Of course these lists may still be printed if desired.
+
+\printshorthands
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8ceb545bd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b24bff3611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7a4a04bbbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/80-style-reading.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'reading' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=reading,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{tabularx}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand*{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newcolumntype{K}{>{\ttfamily}l}
+\newcolumntype{V}{>{\ttfamily\raggedright\let\\\tabularnewline}p{55pt}}
+\newcolumntype{E}{>{\raggedright\let\\\tabularnewline}X}
+\newcolumntype{H}{>{\bfseries}l}
+\newenvironment*{inlinetable}
+ {\trivlist\footnotesize\item}
+ {\endtrivlist}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{reading} style}
+
+This style is useful for personal reading lists, annotated
+biblographies, and similar applications. It optionally adds short
+headers to the bibliography and includes the fields
+\texttt{annotation}, \texttt{abstract}, \texttt{library}, and
+\texttt{file}. Which items are printed depends on package options.
+
+\subsection*{Additional package options}
+
+This package provides the following additional package options:
+
+\begin{inlinetable}
+\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{@{}KVKE@{}}
+\toprule
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{Key} &
+\multicolumn{1}{H}{Values} &
+\multicolumn{1}{H}{Default} &
+\multicolumn{1}{H}{Function} \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}
+\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(l){4-4}
+entryhead & true, false, full, name & true &
+The kind of header to print; \texttt{true} or \texttt{full} adds
+a full header including the name, the title, and the entry key
+(depending on the \texttt{entrykey} option) to each entry,
+\texttt{name} adds a name header once for each author,
+\texttt{false} disables the header\\
+entrykey & true, false & true &
+Whether to include the \texttt{entrykey} field in the
+\texttt{full} header\\
+annotation & true, false & true &
+Whether to print the \texttt{annotation} field\\
+abstract & true, false & true &
+Whether to print the \texttt{abstract} field\\
+library & true, false & true &
+Whether to print the \texttt{library} field\\
+file & true, false & true &
+Whether to print the \texttt{file} field\\
+loadfiles & true, false & true &
+Whether to load annotations and abstracts from external files
+(this is a standard option; see the manual for details)\\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabularx}
+\end{inlinetable}
+%
+On the next page, there are some examples with all options at their default setting.
+
+\clearpage
+
+\nocite{laufenberg,kastenholz,padhye,sigfridsson,itzhaki,wassenberg}
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..65d351b773
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b7103aeccc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6d526addc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/81-style-draft.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'draft' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=draft,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{draft} style}
+
+This is a draft style which simply uses the entry keys as citations.
+The entry keys are also included the in the bibliography which will
+be sorted by entry key.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{bertram,companion,gillies,aristotle:anima}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+\autocite{baez/article,hammond,reese,spiegelberg}
+
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f60436a8c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-bibtex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2deac186b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug-bibtex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6d8edde6ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/82-style-debug.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+%
+% This file presents the 'debug' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=debug,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{debug} style}
+
+This style is intended for debugging only. The citations are printed as a list of all arguments passed to the citation command. The bibliography lists all bibliographic data in tabular format.
+
+\subsection*{Citation examples}
+
+\cite{companion}
+
+\parencite[30]{companion}
+
+\footcite[see][]{companion}
+
+\cite[see][30]{companion}
+
+\cites(see)()[30]{companion}
+
+\printbibliography
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ccabb52e43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..916316b0f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/90-related-entries.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=reading,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\begin{document}
+\nocite{knuth:ct:related,kullback:related,moore:related}
+\nocite{doody,vangennep:trans,vangennep:related,vizedom:related}
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5389046b68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..251e27dcc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/91-sorting-schemes.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,sortcites,sorting=ynt,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\begin{document}
+% This demonstrates that the sorting of citations can be difference to the
+% bibliography. However, this is not always advisable in case of multiple
+% citations in the same year for the same author list. This is because
+% extradate (the "a", "b" etc. in "Smith 2010a" and "Smith 2010b" etc.)
+% depends on the sorting order and if the sorting order is different
+% between citations and bibliography, this can cause confusion.
+Filler text \parencite{wassenberg,cicero,companion,angenendt}.
+\newrefcontext[sorting=nyt]
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ee162c3f4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d43f2b192a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/92-bibliographylists.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+
+% This is needed as printbiblist looks for a driver named after the biblist
+% name
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorttitle}{%
+ \printfield{title}}
+
+% This is optional. If no sorting scheme is specified to \printbiblist, a
+% sorting scheme with the same name as the biblist is used if found.
+% Otherwise as a last resort the global sorting scheme is used
+\DeclareSortingTemplate{shorttitle}{
+ \sort{
+ \field{shorttitle}
+ }
+}
+
+% This is optional and in fact equivalent to the automatically created
+% filter for all fields like "shorttitle" which are declared as "label
+% fields" in the data model. However, if you define it, you can overwrite
+% the default definition which is shown here
+\DeclareBiblistFilter{shorttitle}{
+ \filter[type=field,filter=shorttitle]
+}
+
+% biblatex also creates automatically a "shorttitle" bibliography
+% environment (using \defbibenvironment) which is used by default. You can
+% either redefine this or use the "env" option to \printbiblist to use
+% another one instead.
+
+% The default "biblist" heading is used for all bibliography lists. This
+% can be changed using the "heading" option to \printbiblist
+
+\begin{document}
+\nocite{*}
+
+\printshorthands% With biber, just an alias for \printbiblist{shorthand}
+\printbiblist[title={Title Shorthands}]{shorttitle}
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f61f5a558e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.dbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.dbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..98bafea301
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.dbx
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+\DeclareDatamodelConstant[type=list]{nameparts}{prefix,family,suffix,given,patronymic,papponymic,cjk}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..71b6a5b219
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/93-nameparts.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,439 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\setmainfont{Linux Libertine O}
+\setsansfont{Linux Biolinum O}
+\usepackage[fallback]{xeCJK}
+%\setCJKmainfont{Malgun Gothic}
+\setCJKmainfont{PingFang TC}% OSX
+
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.bib}
+@book{tolstoy,
+ author = {given=Лев, patronymic=Николаевич, family=Толстой, nametemplates=russian},
+ title = {Война и мир},
+ date = {1877},
+ langid = {russian},
+}
+@book{bulgakov,
+ author = {given=Михаил, patronymic=Афанасьевич, family=Булгаков, nametemplates=russian},
+ title = {Мастер и Маргарита},
+ date = {1966},
+ langid = {russian},
+}
+@book{bulgakov:val,
+ author = {given=Валентин, patronymic=Фёдорович, family=Булгаков, nametemplates=russian},
+ title = {Л. Н. Толстой в последний год его жизни},
+ date = {1911},
+ langid = {russian},
+}
+
+@book{dosto:1,
+ author = {given=Александр , patronymic=Андреевич, family=Достоевский, nametemplates=russian},
+ title = {О строении телец Грандри},
+ date = {1885},
+ langid = {russian},
+}
+@book{dosto:2,
+ author = {given=Андрей , patronymic=Андреевич, family=Достоевский, nametemplates=russian},
+ title = {П. П. Семенов-Тян-Шанский как исследователь, географ и статистик},
+ date = {1914},
+ langid = {russian},
+}
+
+@book{demeke,
+ author = {given=Kebede, patronymic=Daniel, papponymic=Demeke, nametemplates=ethiopian},
+ title = {One},
+ date = {1983}
+}
+@book{dameke,
+ author = {given=Kebede, patronymic=Daniel, papponymic=Dameke, nametemplates=ethiopian},
+ title = {Two},
+ date = {1983}
+}
+@book{james,
+ author = {given=Kebede, patronymic=James, papponymic=Demeke, nametemplates=ethiopian},
+ title = {Three},
+ date = {1983}
+}
+@book{jonathan,
+ author = {given=Kebede, patronymic=Jonathan, papponymic=Kebede, nametemplates=ethiopian},
+ title = {Four},
+ date = {1986}
+}
+@book{william,
+ author = {given=Kebede, patronymic=William, papponymic=Kebede, nametemplates=ethiopian},
+ title = {Four},
+ date = {1987}
+}
+
+@book{zhangx1,
+ title = {Shuming},
+ titleaddon = {書名},
+ author = {family=Zhang, cjk=章學成, given=Xuecheng, nametemplates=cjk},
+ location = {Beijing},
+ publisher = {Zhonghua Shuju},
+ date = {2017},
+}
+@book{zhangx2,
+ title = {Shuming er},
+ titleaddon = {書名二},
+ author = {family=Zhang, cjk=張學成, given=Xuecheng, nametemplates=cjk},
+ location = {Shanghai},
+ publisher = {Shangwu Yinshuguan},
+ date = {2016},
+}
+@book{zhangh,
+ title = {Sŏmyŏng},
+ titleaddon = {書名},
+ author = {family=Zhang, cjk=장학성, given=Haksŏng, nametemplates=cjk},
+ location = {Shanghai},
+ publisher = {Shangwu Yinshuguan},
+ date = {2016},
+}
+
+@book{bronte:c,
+ author = {Charlotte Brontë},
+ date = {1847},
+ title = {Jane Eyre},
+}
+@book{bronte:e,
+ author = {Emily Brontë},
+ date = {1847},
+ title = {Wuthering Heights},
+}
+
+@book{austen:jane,
+ author = {Jane Austen},
+ date = {1813},
+ title = {Pride and Prejudice},
+}
+@collection{austen:john,
+ editor = {John Austen},
+ editortype = {compiler},
+ date = {1924},
+ title = {Rogues in Porcelain: A Miscellany of 18th Poems},
+}
+\end{filecontents}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,datamodel=93-nameparts,backend=biber, autolang=hyphen]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+\addbibresource{\jobname.bib}
+
+
+% Use transliteration to sort Cyrillic among Latin script
+\DeclareSortTranslit{
+ \translit[russian]{*}{russian}{bgn/pcgn-standard}
+}
+
+\makeatletter
+%% CJK names
+% the idea is to sort family -> given -> cjk (full name)
+% and disambiguate in the same manner using only full
+% forms of the name, no initials
+% the order should always be family -> given -> cjk
+% names are not reversed
+\DeclareSortingNamekeyTemplate[cjk]{
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{family}
+ }
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{given}
+ }
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{cjk}
+ }
+}
+
+\DeclareUniquenameTemplate[cjk]{
+ \namepart[base=true]{family}
+ \namepart[disambiguation=full]{given}
+ \namepart[disambiguation=full]{cjk}
+}
+
+\newbibmacro*{name:cjk}[3]{%
+ \usebibmacro{name:delim}{#2#3#1}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#2#3#1}%
+ \mkbibnamefamily{#1}%
+ \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}%
+ \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamecjk{#3}}}
+
+%% Ethiopian names
+% Ethiopian names are given -> patronymic -> papponymic
+% the latter two are only needed for disambiguation
+% names order is never reversed
+\DeclareSortingNamekeyTemplate[ethiopian]{
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{given}
+ }
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{patronymic}
+ }
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{papponymic}
+ }
+}
+
+\DeclareUniquenameTemplate[ethiopian]{
+ \namepart[base=true]{given}
+ \namepart[disambiguation=full]{patronymic}
+ \namepart[disambiguation=full]{papponymic}
+}
+
+\newbibmacro*{name:ethiopian}[3]{%
+ \usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1#2#3}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1#2#3}%
+ \mkbibethgiven{#1}%
+ \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibethpat{#2}\isdot}%
+ \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibethpap{#3}\isdot}}
+
+\let\mkbibethgiven\mkbibnamefamily
+\let\mkbibethpat\mkbibnamegiven
+\let\mkbibethpap\mkbibnamegiven
+
+%% Russian names
+% family -> given -> patronymic
+% we never show the given name alone, it is always accompanied
+% by the patronymic
+% (patronymic could just be treated as another given name)
+% reversed name order is 'family, given patronymic'
+\DeclareSortingNamekeyTemplate[russian]{
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{family}
+ }
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{given}
+ }
+ \keypart{
+ \namepart{patronymic}
+ }
+}
+
+\DeclareUniquenameTemplate[russian]{
+ \namepart[base=true]{family}
+ \namepart{given}
+ \namepart{patronymic}
+}
+
+\newbibmacro*{name:russian}[3]{%
+ \usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1#2#3}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1#2#3}%
+ \ifdefvoid{#2}
+ {}
+ {\mkbibnamegiven{#2}\isdot\bibnamedelimd
+ \ifdefvoid{#3}
+ {}
+ {\mkbibnamepatronymic{#3}\isdot\bibnamedelimd}}%
+ \mkbibnamefamily{#1}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{name:russian-rev}[3]{%
+ \usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1#2#3}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1#2#3}%
+ \mkbibnamefamily{#1}%
+ \ifdefvoid{#2}
+ {}
+ {\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd
+ \mkbibnamegiven{#2}\isdot
+ \ifdefvoid{#3}
+ {}
+ {\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamepatronymic{#3}\isdot}}}
+
+%% sortname
+% helper to select the sorting template in \ifcase
+\newcommand*{\abx@sortingnamekeytemplate}{0}
+\newcommand*{\abx@getsortingnamekeytemplate}{%
+ \ifsortingnamekeytemplatename{cjk}
+ {\def\abx@sortingnamekeytemplate{1}}
+ {\ifsortingnamekeytemplatename{ethiopian}
+ {\def\abx@sortingnamekeytemplate{2}}
+ {\ifsortingnamekeytemplatename{russian}
+ {\def\abx@sortingnamekeytemplate{3}}
+ {}}}}
+
+% show fullest version of names,
+% reverse Russian and western names for sorting
+% all other names are always in the correct order for sorting
+\DeclareNameFormat{sortname}{%
+ \abx@getsortingnamekeytemplate
+ \ifcase\abx@sortingnamekeytemplate\relax
+ \usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartprefix}
+ {\namepartsuffix}%
+ \or
+ \usebibmacro{name:cjk}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartcjk}%
+ \or
+ \usebibmacro{name:ethiopian}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartpatronymic}
+ {\namepartpapponymic}%
+ \or
+ \usebibmacro{name:russian-rev}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartpatronymic}%
+ \fi
+ \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
+
+%% labelname
+% copy of the standard definition in biblatex.def
+% uses the 'old way' of finding the disambiguating name part
+\newbibmacro{labelname:western}{%
+ \ifcase\value{uniquename}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:family}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartprefix}
+ {\namepartsuffix}%
+ \or
+ \ifuseprefix
+ {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiveni}
+ {\namepartprefix}
+ {\namepartsuffixi}}
+ {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiveni}
+ {\namepartprefixi}
+ {\namepartsuffixi}}%
+ \or
+ \usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartprefix}
+ {\namepartsuffix}%
+ \fi
+ \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
+
+% Uses \iffieldequalstr{uniquepart} to find the disambiguating
+% name part.
+% If neither base (i.e. family) nor given name are enough,
+% go with the full name.
+% Uses \empty for suppressed name parts, so we don't have to define
+% dedicated macros for the shorter name forms.
+\newbibmacro{labelname:cjk}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{uniquepart}{base}%
+ {\usebibmacro{name:cjk}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\empty}
+ {\empty}}
+ {\iffieldequalstr{uniquepart}{given}%
+ {\usebibmacro{name:cjk}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\empty}}
+ {\usebibmacro{name:cjk}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartcjk}}}}
+
+% similar to the CJK format
+\newbibmacro{labelname:ethiopian}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{uniquepart}{base}%
+ {\usebibmacro{name:ethiopian}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\empty}
+ {\empty}}
+ {\iffieldequalstr{uniquepart}{patronymic}%
+ {\usebibmacro{name:ethiopian}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartpatronymic}
+ {\empty}}
+ {\usebibmacro{name:ethiopian}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartpatronymic}
+ {\namepartpapponymic}}}}
+
+% Uses \iffieldequalstr{uniquepart} to get the disambiguating
+% name part.
+% We only choose between 'Given Patronymic Family' and
+% 'G. P. Family', the decision whether or not to use
+% initials is for the given name to decide.
+% If the given initial is enough to disambiguate the name,
+% the given name and patronymic become initials.
+% Even if the initial of the patronymic would make the name
+% unique we go with the full name instead.
+% There is no 'Given P. Family' format.
+% \namepart<>un=1 says initials are enough
+% 2 means the full name is required
+% 0 means not used
+\newbibmacro{labelname:russian}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{uniquepart}{base}%
+ {\usebibmacro{name:russian}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\empty}
+ {\empty}}
+ {\ifnum\namepartgivenun=1\relax
+ \usebibmacro{name:russian}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiveni}
+ {\namepartpatronymici}%
+ \else
+ \usebibmacro{name:russian}
+ {\namepartfamily}
+ {\namepartgiven}
+ {\namepartpatronymic}%
+ \fi}}
+
+% helper to select the uniquename template in \ifcase
+\newcommand*{\abx@uniquenametemplatename}{0}
+\newcommand*{\abx@getuniquenametemplatename}{%
+ \ifuniquenametemplatename{cjk}
+ {\def\abx@uniquenametemplatename{1}}
+ {\ifuniquenametemplatename{ethiopian}
+ {\def\abx@uniquenametemplatename{2}}
+ {\ifuniquenametemplatename{russian}
+ {\def\abx@uniquenametemplatename{3}}
+ {}}}}
+
+\DeclareNameFormat{labelname}{%
+ \abx@getuniquenametemplatename
+ \ifcase\abx@uniquenametemplatename\relax
+ \usebibmacro{labelname:western}%
+ \or
+ \usebibmacro{labelname:cjk}%
+ \or
+ \usebibmacro{labelname:ethiopian}%
+ \or
+ \usebibmacro{labelname:russian}%
+ \fi
+ \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
+\makeatother
+
+\begin{document}
+% Historically, name handling in latex bibliographies has been determined by
+% the name parsing rules of bibtex. In a modern context, this name handling
+% is rather archaic, restricted to Western names with the four parts
+% "family", "given", "prefix", "suffix" (often referred to in bibtex
+% documentation as "last", "first", "von" and "Jr" parts). When using biber,
+% it is possible to define arbitrary name parts since the allowable name
+% parts are defined in the data model (see accompanying file 93-nameparts.dbx).
+
+% Here we demonstrate the possibility of adding a new name parts to the
+% datamodel and then using it in formatting, sorting etc.
+% Notice that we can use the new name part types in the datasource
+% which is now allowable due to the enhanced datamodel constant definition.
+% We have also defined a new name format and method of sorting names which
+% are aware of the new name parts.
+%
+\textcite{tolstoy,bulgakov,bulgakov:val}
+
+\textcite{dosto:1}
+
+\textcite{dosto:2}
+
+\textcite{demeke,dameke,james,jonathan,william}
+
+\textcite{sigfridsson,worman,geer,knuth:ct:a,cicero,companion,vangennep}
+
+\textcite{bronte:c,bronte:e,austen:jane,austen:john}
+
+\textcite{zhangx1,zhangx2,zhangh}
+
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..749c676ab0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e8f025078c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/94-labelprefix.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=numeric, sorting=none, defernumbers=true, backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyCategory{cat1}
+\addtocategory{cat1}{yoon}
+\DeclareBibliographyCategory{cat2}
+\addtocategory{cat2}{piccato}
+\assignrefcontextcats[sorting=none,labelprefix=Q]{cat2}
+\assignrefcontextentries[labelprefix=Q]{yoon}
+\assignrefcontextkeyws*[sorting=none,labelprefix=S]{secondary}
+\defbibfilter{cats}{category=cat1 or category=cat2}
+
+\DeclareRefcontext{rcone}{labelprefix=R}
+\DeclareRefcontext{rctwo}{labelprefix=T}
+\DeclareRefcontext{rcthree}{sorting=nty}
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\begin{document}
+This example demonstrates the quite complex options for assigning
+labelprefices to bibliographies and how citations decide which bibliography
+to point to. The default rule is that a citation will point to its entry in
+the last bibliography in which it appears. This can be overridden by
+explicit assignment to particular refcontexts with the
+\cmd{assignrefcontext*} macros.\\
+
+% refcontext=none/global//global/global
+
+This is a publication by Aristotle:
+\cite{aristotle:anima} % comes from refcontext=none/global/R/global/global
+
+These are not publications by Aristotle:
+\cite{yoon} % comes from default refcontext=none/global/Q/global/global due
+ % to \assignrefcontextentries
+\cite{worman} % comes from default refcontext=nty/global//global/global and not from
+ % nty/global/T/global/global in next refsection even though that is the
+ % last printed bib/biblist with worman in it. This is because
+ % refcontext defaults are local to refcontexts
+\cite{piccato} % comes from refcontext=none/global/Q/global/global due to \assignrefcontextcats
+\cite{nussbaum} % comes from refcontext=none/global/S/global/global due to \assignrefcontextkeyws*
+
+This is another publication by Aristotle:
+\cite{aristotle:physics} % comes from refcontext=none/global/R/global/global
+
+\begin{refcontext}{rcone}
+% refcontext=none/global/R/global/global
+\printbibliography[keyword=primary, title={Aristotle Publications}]
+% aristotle:anima and aristotle:physics default refcontext is this one
+\end{refcontext}
+
+% Alternative style of specifying refcontext
+% Note here that the optional argument to \newrefcontext overrides the
+% value set with the named refcontext
+\newrefcontext[labelprefix=S]{rctwo}
+% refcontext=none/global/S/global/global
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=primary, title={Other publications}]
+\endrefcontext
+
+\begin{refcontext}[labelprefix=Q]
+% refcontext=none/global/Q/global/global
+\printbibliography[filter=cats, title={Other publications}]
+\end{refcontext}
+
+\begin{refcontext}[sorting=nty]
+% refcontext=nty/global//global/global
+\printbibliography[resetnumbers, notkeyword=primary, title={More Other publications}]
+% Nussbaum default refcontext is this one
+% piccato default refcontext is this one
+% yoon default refcontext is this one
+% worman default refcontext is this one
+\cite{nussbaum} % comes from refcontext=nty/global//global/global due to weak \assignrefcontextkeyws*
+\end{refcontext}
+
+\section*{New Refsection}
+\newrefsection
+\cite{worman} % comes from default refcontext=nty/global/T/global/global
+\begin{refcontext}[labelprefix=T]{rcone}
+% refcontext=nty/global//global/global
+\printbibliography[resetnumbers, notkeyword=primary, title={More Other publications}]
+\end{refcontext}
+
+\end{document} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dd5796cca4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..611798f6b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+@ARTICLE{test1,
+ AUTHOR = {Arthur Smith and James Jones and Bill Smiley and Jake Wrath},
+ JOURNALTITLE = {A Journal},
+ YEAR = {2010}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{test2,
+ AUTHOR = {Philippa Smyth and Arthur Smith and Bill Likely},
+ JOURNALTITLE = {Another Journal},
+ YEAR = {2011}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{test3,
+ AUTHOR = {Arthur Smith},
+ JOURNALTITLE = {The Best Journal},
+ YEAR = {2013}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{test4,
+ AUTHOR = {Philippa Smyth and Arthur Smith and James Jones},
+ JOURNALTITLE = {Again Another Journal},
+ YEAR = {2014}
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.dbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.dbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5abddf79e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.dbx
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+\DeclareDatamodelFields[type=list, datatype=name, label=true]{coauthor}
+\DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{coauthor}
+\DeclareDatamodelEntryfields[coauthor]{coauthor}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..74d0ee9c6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/95-customlists.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+% Using a custom data model to declare the "coauthor" field
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,datamodel=95-customlists,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{95-customlists.bib}
+
+% 1. First, check if the author list contain me, here, "Arthur Smith" (and
+% isn't *just* me as then we can ignore this entry as there are no coauthors)
+% 2. Copy the author field to a temporary field "coauthortext". We don't need
+% datamodel declarations for this as this will be deleted after use and
+% will never get anywhere near code that queries the data model.
+% 3. Remove me (Arthur Smith) from this temporary copy of the author list
+% 4. Turn the resulting field into a comma-separated list
+% 5. Loop over this comma-separated list, creating new entries of type
+% "coauthor" each with a "coauthor" name list field containing the data
+% from the loop variable
+% 6. Remove the temporary author field copy "coauthortext"
+%
+% The special $MAPLOOP variable holds each value of the csv field named by
+% the "foreach" option on the \map macro.
+% The special $MAPUNIQ variable is a random string generated automatically
+% at the beginning of each \map section. This is useful when you need a unique
+% string as we do here because citation keys should be unique.
+% $MAPLOOPVAL can be used to refer to the last created $MAPUNIQ
+\DeclareSourcemap{
+ \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
+ \map[overwrite]{
+ \step[fieldsource=author,
+ match=\regexp{Arthur\s+Smith}, final]
+ \step[fieldsource=author,
+ notmatch=\regexp{^Arthur\s+Smith$}, final]
+ \step[fieldsource=author, fieldset=coauthortext, origfieldval]
+ \step[fieldsource=coauthortext,
+ match=\regexp{Arthur\s+Smith\s+and\s+},
+ replace={}]
+ \step[fieldsource=coauthortext,
+ match=\regexp{\s+and\s+Arthur\s+Smith},
+ replace={}]
+ \step[fieldsource=coauthortext,
+ match=\regexp{\s+and\s+},
+ replace={,}]
+ }
+ \map[overwrite, foreach=coauthortext]{
+ \step[fieldsource=coauthortext, match=\regexp{.}, final]
+ \step[entrynew=\regexp{$MAPUNIQ}, entrynewtype=coauthor]
+ \step[entrytarget=\regexp{$MAPUNIQVAL}, fieldset=coauthor, fieldvalue=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}]
+ \step[entrytarget=\regexp{$MAPUNIQVAL}, fieldset=options, fieldvalue=skipbib]
+ }
+ \map[overwrite]{
+ \step[fieldsource=coauthortext, null]
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+% Sort the biblist by coauthor name
+\DeclareSortingTemplate{coauthor}{
+ \sort{
+ \field{coauthor}
+ }
+}
+
+% Driver to print the biblist items
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{coauthor}{%
+ \printnames{coauthor}}
+
+% bibcheck to strip duplicates
+\defbibcheck{coauthor}{%
+ \ifcsdef{\strname{coauthor}}
+ {\skipentry}
+ {\savenamecs{coauthor}{\strname{coauthor}}}}
+
+% Simple bibenvironment to print the biblist
+\defbibenvironment{coauthor}
+{\list{}
+ {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{-\leftmargin}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
+{\endlist}
+{\item}
+
+\begin{document}
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography
+% This will automatically use the "coauthor" sorting scheme/biblist/driver etc.
+\printbiblist[title=CoAuthors]{coauthor}
+\end{document}
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..88315c0124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e12010a3d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/96-dates.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates various date formats and tests which apply to them
+% for output
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.bib}
+@misc{date1,
+ note = {Years with implicit era},
+ author = {Author1},
+ date = {-0099-07-11/-0043-03-13}, % Negative date range
+ origdate = {-0477}, % Negative date
+ eventdate = {0477/0566}, % Forced CE era due to dateeraauto setting
+ urldate = {-0020/0100}, % Cross BCE/CE range
+}
+@misc{date2,
+ note = {Dates with circa and uncertain markers},
+ author = {Author2},
+ date = {1723%}, % year with ETDF approximate (circa) and uncertainty markers
+ origdate = {1934-02~}, % year and month with circa marker
+ eventdate = {1976?}, % year with uncertainty marker
+ urldate = {1922~}, % year with ETDF approximate (circa) marker
+}
+@misc{date3,
+ note = {Date ranges},
+ author = {Author3},
+ date = {1934~/1936~}, % year range with circa markers
+ origdate = {1723~/..}, % open-ended year range with circa marker
+ eventdate = {1976?/..}, % open-ended year range with uncertainty marker
+ urldate = {1976/..} % open-ended year range with open marker
+}
+@misc{date4,
+ note = {Times},
+ author = {Author4},
+ date = {2004-04-25T14:34:00/2004-04-25T14:37:06}, % Date with time, floating timezone
+ origdate = {2004-04-25T14:34:00Z/2004-04-25T14:34:05Z}, % Date with time, UTC timezone
+ eventdate = {2004-04-25T14:34:00+05:00/2004-04-25T15:34:00+05:00}, % Date with time, explicit timezone
+ urldate = {2004-04-25T14:34:00/2004-04-25T15:00:00}, % Datetime range
+}
+@misc{date5,
+ note = {Seasons},
+ author = {Author5},
+ date = {1723-21}, % season (21=spring, 22=summer, 23=autumn, 24=winter)
+ origdate = {1934-24~}, % uncertain year plus season
+ eventdate = {1934-22/1934-23}, % range with seasons
+}
+@misc{date6,
+ % uses the 'nodate' localisation string due to default \DeclareLabeldate setting
+ note = {Date from literal/localisation string},
+ author = {Author6},
+}
+@misc{date7,
+ note = {Unspecified dates can be used to do amusing things},
+ author = {Author7},
+ date = {19XX}, % unspecified year in century
+ origdate = {199X}, % unspecified year in decade
+}
+@misc{date8,
+ note = {Astronomical year era},
+ author = {Author8},
+ date = {0001}, % with dateera=astronomical, 1, otherwise 1 CE
+ origdate = {0000}, % with dateera=astronomical, 0, otherwise 1 BCE
+ eventdate = {-0001}, % with dateera=astronomical, -1, otherwise 2 BCE
+ urldate = {-0379} % with dateera=astronomical, -379, otherwise 380 BCE
+}
+@misc{date9,
+ note = {Automatic era setting},
+ author = {Author9},
+ date = {1066},
+ origdate = {0876},
+ eventdate = {0402},
+ urldate = {-0382}
+}
+@misc{date10,
+ note = {More Date ranges},
+ author = {Author10},
+ date = {1034/}, % unknown
+ origdate = {/1034}, % unknown
+ eventdate = {../1034}, % open-start to year range
+ urldate = {../1034} % open
+}
+\end{filecontents}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,%
+ % dateabbrev=false,% when false, don't abbreviate months/seasons
+ % julian=true,% convert dates before gregorianstart to Julian Calendar
+ % gregorianstart=1582-10-15,% Default
+ alldates=short,%
+ % alldates=ymd,% Year-Month-Day format
+ % alldates=iso,% ISO8601 format
+ alldatesusetime=true, % print time components in non-compact date ranges
+ alltimes=12h,%
+ % alltimes=24h,% prints 24 hour format times (default)
+ % alltimes=24hcomp,% prints 24 hour compressed format times
+ % seconds=true,% uncomment to print seconds
+ % timezones=true,% uncomment to print timezones
+ datezeros=false,% pad date components with zeros?
+ dateera=secular,% prints BCE/CE controlled by dateerauto, datezeros
+ % dateera=christian,% prints BC/AD controlled by dateerauto, datezeros
+ % dateera=astronomical,% prints astronomical dates, controlled by datezeros
+ dateeraauto=600,% Sets the max year ceiling for automatic printing of era
+ % abbreviate=false,% prints full date localisation strings
+ dateuncertain=true,%
+ datecirca=true,%
+ sorting=none,%
+ backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{\jobname.bib}
+
+\defbibenvironment{simple}
+{\list{}
+ {\setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\bibitemsep}{1ex}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
+{\endlist}
+{\item}
+
+\DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{time}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labeltime}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{origtime}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{eventtime}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{urltime}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
+ \printfield[emph]{note}\\
+ \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
+ \printtext[bold]{labeldate = }\printlabeldate
+ \iffieldundef{labelhour}{}
+ {\\\printtext[bold]{labeltime = }\printlabeltime}}\\%
+ \iffieldundef{year}{}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{dateunspecified}{yearincentury}
+ {\printtext[bold]{date = }\number\numexpr\thefield{year}/100+1\relax th Century}
+ {\printtext[bold]{date = }\printdate
+ \iffieldundef{hour}{}
+ {\\\printtext[bold]{time = }\printtime}}}\\%
+ \iffieldundef{origyear}{}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{origdateunspecified}{yearindecade}
+ {\printtext[bold]{date = }The \expandafter\@gobbletwo\number\thefield{origyear}s}
+ {\printtext[bold]{origdate = }\printorigdate
+ \iffieldundef{orighour}{}
+ {\\\printtext[bold]{origtime = }\printorigtime}}}\\%
+ \iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{%
+ \printtext[bold]{eventdate = }\printeventdate
+ \iffieldundef{eventhour}{}
+ {\\\printtext[bold]{eventtime = }\printeventtime}}\\%
+ \iffieldundef{urlyear}{}{%
+ \printtext[bold]{urldate = }\printurldate
+ \iffieldundef{urlhour}{}
+ {\\\printtext[bold]{urltime = }\printurltime}}%
+ }
+
+\begin{document}
+\section*{Date formats}
+This example file parses and formats some of the supported date formats and
+demonstrates the output options. See the source for details. You can change
+the options in the source file and this document will show you the options chosen.
+\subsection*{Options used to format this test document}
+\begingroup
+datecirca=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@datecirca}{1}{0}}\\
+dateuncertain=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@dateuncertain}{1}{0}}\\
+dateera=\textbf{\blx@dateera}\\
+dateerauto=\textbf{\blx@dateeraauto}\\
+datezeros=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@datezeros}{1}{0}}\\
+timezeros=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@timezeros}{1}{0}}\\
+timezones=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@timezones}{1}{0}}\\
+seconds=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@seconds}{1}{0}}\\
+julian=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@julian}{1}{0}}\\
+gregorianstart=\textbf{\blx@gregorianstart}\\
+\def\do#1{%
+ #1=\textbf{\csuse{blx@dateformat@#1}}\\}
+\do{labeldate}
+\abx@dodates
+\def\do#1{%
+ #1time=\textbf{\csuse{blx@timeformat@#1time}}\\
+ #1dateusetime=\textbf{\iftoggle{blx@#1dateusetime}{1}{0}}\\}
+\do{label}
+\abx@dodatetypes
+\endgroup
+\subsection*{Example Citation Formats}
+\textcite{date1,date2,date3,date4,date5,date6,date7,date8,date9,date10}\\[1ex]
+\cite{date1}\\
+\cite{date2}\\
+\cite{date3}\\
+\cite{date4}\\
+\cite{date5}\\
+\cite{date6}\\
+\cite{date7}\\
+\cite{date8}\\
+\cite{date9}\\
+\cite{date10}
+\printbibliography[env=simple,title={Example Bibliography Formats}]
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations-biber.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations-biber.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9fa5afc943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations-biber.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0738b2fe2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+%% LaTeX2e file `97-annotations.bib'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `97-annotations' on 2018/10/04.
+%%
+@MISC{ann1,
+ AUTHOR = {Last1, First1 and Last2, First2 and Last3, First3},
+ AUTHOR+an = {1:family=student;2=corresponding},
+ TITLE = {The Title},
+ TITLE+an:default = {=titleannotation},
+ TITLE+an:french = {="Le titre"},
+ TITLE+an:german = {="Der Titel"}
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..03be50f142
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/97-annotations.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates the data annotation feature
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.bib}
+@MISC{ann1,
+ AUTHOR = {Last1, First1 and Last2, First2 and Last3, First3},
+ AUTHOR+an = {1:family=student;2=corresponding},
+ TITLE = {The Title},
+ TITLE+an:default = {=titleannotation},
+ TITLE+an:french = {="Le titre"},
+ TITLE+an:german = {="Der Titel"}
+}
+\end{filecontents}
+\usepackage[backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{\jobname.bib}
+
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamefamily}[1]{%
+ \ifitemannotation{corresponding}
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}%
+ \ifpartannotation{family}{student}
+ {\textsuperscript{*}}
+ {}}
+
+% Default for numeric style so we are overriding the active format for titles
+\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{
+ \iffieldannotation{titleannotation}{\textsc{#1}}{#1}%
+ \hasfieldannotation[][french]{\mkbibparens{\getfieldannotation[][french]}}{}%
+ \hasfieldannotation[][german]{\mkbibparens{\getfieldannotation[][german]}}{}}
+
+\begin{document}
+The annotation feature allows the user to attache metadata, either in the
+form of strings to be tested for in formatting commands, or in the form of
+strings to be printed as-is. This example demonstrates all aspects of the
+annotation feature:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Metadata attaching to fields, items in a list or parts of an item in
+ a list (e.g. name parts)
+\item Literal annotations where the annotation is a string to be printed
+ rather than used as a metadata test for other formatting.
+\item Multiple named annotations for the same data field.
+\item The ``default'' name for annotations with no explicit name.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\cite{ann1}
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..10f114bc76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,1667 @@
+@string{anch-ie = {Angew.~Chem. Int.~Ed.}}
+@string{cup = {Cambridge University Press}}
+@string{dtv = {Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag}}
+@string{hup = {Harvard University Press}}
+@string{jams = {J.~Amer. Math. Soc.}}
+@string{jchph = {J.~Chem. Phys.}}
+@string{jomch = {J.~Organomet. Chem.}}
+@string{pup = {Princeton University Press}}
+
+@incollection{westfahl:space,
+ author = {Westfahl, Gary},
+ title = {The True Frontier},
+ subtitle = {Confronting and Avoiding the Realities of Space in {American}
+ Science Fiction Films},
+ pages = {55-65},
+ crossref = {westfahl:frontier},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ indextitle = {True Frontier, The},
+ annotation = {A cross-referenced article from a \texttt{collection}. This is
+ an \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{crossref}
+ field. Note the \texttt{subtitle} and \texttt{indextitle}
+ fields},
+}
+
+@set{set,
+ entryset = {herrmann,aksin,yoon},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{set} with three members. The \texttt{crossref} field
+ in the \texttt{@set} entry and the \texttt{entryset} field in
+ each set member entry is needed only when using BibTeX as the
+ backend},
+}
+
+@set{stdmodel,
+ entryset = {glashow,weinberg,salam},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{set} with three members discussing the standard
+ model of particle physics. The \texttt{crossref} field
+ in the \texttt{@set} entry and the \texttt{entryset} field in
+ each set member entry is needed only when using BibTeX as the
+ backend},
+}
+
+@article{aksin,
+ author = {Aks{\i}n, {\"O}zge and T{\"u}rkmen, Hayati and Artok, Levent
+ and {\c{C}}etinkaya, Bekir and Ni, Chaoying and
+ B{\"u}y{\"u}kg{\"u}ng{\"o}r, Orhan and {\"O}zkal, Erhan},
+ title = {Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics of
+ saturated {Pd-N}-heterocyclic carbenes in {Mizoroki-Heck}
+ reactions},
+ journaltitle = jomch,
+ date = 2006,
+ volume = 691,
+ number = 13,
+ pages = {3027-3036},
+ indextitle = {Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics},
+}
+
+@article{angenendt,
+ author = {Angenendt, Arnold},
+ title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der
+ Patrozinienkunde},
+ journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
+ date = 2002,
+ volume = 97,
+ pages = {431--456, 791--823},
+ langid = {german},
+ indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ annotation = {A German article in a French journal. Apart from that, a
+ typical \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{indextitle}
+ field},
+}
+
+@article{baez/article,
+ author = {Baez, John C. and Lauda, Aaron D.},
+ title = {Higher-Dimensional Algebra {V}: 2-Groups},
+ journaltitle = {Theory and Applications of Categories},
+ date = 2004,
+ volume = 12,
+ pages = {423-491},
+ version = 3,
+ eprint = {math/0307200v3},
+ eprinttype = {arxiv},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} with \texttt{eprint} and
+ \texttt{eprinttype} fields. Note that the arXiv reference is
+ transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support
+ has been enabled. Compare \texttt{baez\slash online}, which
+ is the same item given as an \texttt{online} entry},
+}
+
+@article{bertram,
+ author = {Bertram, Aaron and Wentworth, Richard},
+ title = {Gromov invariants for holomorphic maps on {Riemann} surfaces},
+ journaltitle = jams,
+ date = 1996,
+ volume = 9,
+ number = 2,
+ pages = {529-571},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ shorttitle = {Gromov invariants},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with a \texttt{volume} and a
+ \texttt{number} field},
+}
+
+@article{doody,
+ author = {Doody, Terrence},
+ title = {Hemingway's Style and {Jake's} Narration},
+ year = 1974,
+ volume = 4,
+ number = 3,
+ pages = {212-225},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ related = {matuz:doody},
+ relatedstring= {\autocap{e}xcerpt in},
+ journal = {The Journal of Narrative Technique},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry cited as an excerpt from a
+ \texttt{collection} entry. Note the format of the
+ \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedstring} fields},
+}
+
+@collection{matuz:doody,
+ editor = {Matuz, Roger},
+ title = {Contemporary Literary Criticism},
+ year = 1990,
+ volume = 61,
+ publisher = {Gale},
+ location = {Detroit},
+ pages = {204-208},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry providing the excerpt information
+ for the \texttt{doody} entry. Note the format of the
+ \texttt{pages} field},
+}
+
+@article{gillies,
+ author = {Gillies, Alexander},
+ title = {Herder and the Preparation of {Goethe's} Idea of World
+ Literature},
+ journaltitle = {Publications of the English Goethe Society},
+ date = 1933,
+ series = {newseries},
+ volume = 9,
+ pages = {46-67},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with a \texttt{series} and a
+ \texttt{volume} field. Note that format of the \texttt{series}
+ field in the database file},
+}
+
+@article{glashow,
+ author = {Glashow, Sheldon},
+ title = {Partial Symmetries of Weak Interactions},
+ journaltitle = {Nucl.~Phys.},
+ date = 1961,
+ volume = 22,
+ pages = {579-588},
+}
+
+@article{herrmann,
+ author = {Herrmann, Wolfgang A. and {\"O}fele, Karl and Schneider,
+ Sabine K. and Herdtweck, Eberhardt and Hoffmann, Stephan D.},
+ title = {A carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst ligand for {C--C}
+ coupling reactions},
+ journaltitle = anch-ie,
+ date = 2006,
+ volume = 45,
+ number = 23,
+ pages = {3859-3862},
+ indextitle = {Carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst, A},
+}
+
+@article{kastenholz,
+ author = {Kastenholz, M. A. and H{\"u}nenberger, Philippe H.},
+ title = {Computation of methodology\hyphen independent ionic solvation
+ free energies from molecular simulations},
+ journaltitle = jchph,
+ date = 2006,
+ subtitle = {{I}. {The} electrostatic potential in molecular liquids},
+ volume = 124,
+ eid = 124106,
+ doi = {10.1063/1.2172593},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ indextitle = {Computation of ionic solvation free energies},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with an \texttt{eid} and a
+ \texttt{doi} field. Note that the \textsc{doi} is transformed
+ into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been
+ enabled},
+ abstract = {The computation of ionic solvation free energies from
+ atomistic simulations is a surprisingly difficult problem that
+ has found no satisfactory solution for more than 15 years. The
+ reason is that the charging free energies evaluated from such
+ simulations are affected by very large errors. One of these is
+ related to the choice of a specific convention for summing up
+ the contributions of solvent charges to the electrostatic
+ potential in the ionic cavity, namely, on the basis of point
+ charges within entire solvent molecules (M scheme) or on the
+ basis of individual point charges (P scheme). The use of an
+ inappropriate convention may lead to a charge-independent
+ offset in the calculated potential, which depends on the
+ details of the summation scheme, on the quadrupole-moment
+ trace of the solvent molecule, and on the approximate form
+ used to represent electrostatic interactions in the
+ system. However, whether the M or P scheme (if any) represents
+ the appropriate convention is still a matter of on-going
+ debate. The goal of the present article is to settle this
+ long-standing controversy by carefully analyzing (both
+ analytically and numerically) the properties of the
+ electrostatic potential in molecular liquids (and inside
+ cavities within them).},
+}
+
+@article{murray,
+ author = {Hostetler, Michael J. and Wingate, Julia E. and Zhong,
+ Chuan-Jian and Harris, Jay E. and Vachet, Richard W. and
+ Clark, Michael R. and Londono, J. David and Green, Stephen
+ J. and Stokes, Jennifer J. and Wignall, George D. and Glish,
+ Gary L. and Porter, Marc D. and Evans, Neal D. and Murray,
+ Royce W.},
+ title = {Alkanethiolate gold cluster molecules with core diameters from
+ 1.5 to 5.2~{nm}},
+ journaltitle = {Langmuir},
+ date = 1998,
+ subtitle = {Core and monolayer properties as a function of core size},
+ volume = 14,
+ number = 1,
+ pages = {17-30},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ indextitle = {Alkanethiolate gold cluster molecules},
+ shorttitle = {Alkanethiolate gold cluster molecules},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with \arabic{author} authors. By
+ default, long author and editor lists are automatically
+ truncated. This is configurable},
+}
+
+@article{reese,
+ author = {Reese, Trevor R.},
+ title = {Georgia in {Anglo-Spanish} Diplomacy, 1736--1739},
+ journaltitle = {William and Mary Quarterly},
+ date = 1958,
+ series = 3,
+ volume = 15,
+ pages = {168-190},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with a \texttt{series} and a
+ \texttt{volume} field. Note the format of the series. If the
+ value of the \texttt{series} field is an integer, this number
+ is printed as an ordinal and the string \enquote*{series} is
+ appended automatically},
+}
+
+@article{sarfraz,
+ author = {M. Sarfraz and M. F. A. Razzak},
+ title = {Technical section: {An} algorithm for automatic capturing of
+ the font outlines},
+ year = 2002,
+ volume = 26,
+ number = 5,
+ pages = {795-804},
+ issn = {0097-8493},
+ journal = {Computers and Graphics},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with an \texttt{issn} field},
+}
+
+@article{shore,
+ author = {Shore, Bradd},
+ title = {Twice-Born, Once Conceived},
+ journaltitle = {American Anthropologist},
+ date = {1991-03},
+ subtitle = {Meaning Construction and Cultural Cognition},
+ series = {newseries},
+ volume = 93,
+ number = 1,
+ pages = {9-27},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with \texttt{series},
+ \texttt{volume}, and \texttt{number} fields. Note the format
+ of the \texttt{series} which is a localization key},
+}
+
+@article{sigfridsson,
+ author = {Sigfridsson, Emma and Ryde, Ulf},
+ title = {Comparison of methods for deriving atomic charges from the
+ electrostatic potential and moments},
+ journaltitle = {Journal of Computational Chemistry},
+ date = 1998,
+ volume = 19,
+ number = 4,
+ pages = {377-395},
+ doi = {10.1002/(SICI)1096-987X(199803)19:4<377::AID-JCC1>3.0.CO;2-P},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ indextitle = {Methods for deriving atomic charges},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry with \texttt{volume},
+ \texttt{number}, and \texttt{doi} fields. Note that the
+ \textsc{doi} is transformed into a clickable link if
+ \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled},
+ abstract = {Four methods for deriving partial atomic charges from the
+ quantum chemical electrostatic potential (CHELP, CHELPG,
+ Merz-Kollman, and RESP) have been compared and critically
+ evaluated. It is shown that charges strongly depend on how and
+ where the potential points are selected. Two alternative
+ methods are suggested to avoid the arbitrariness in the
+ point-selection schemes and van der Waals exclusion radii:
+ CHELP-BOW, which also estimates the charges from the
+ electrostatic potential, but with potential points that are
+ Boltzmann-weighted after their occurrence in actual
+ simulations using the energy function of the program in which
+ the charges will be used, and CHELMO, which estimates the
+ charges directly from the electrostatic multipole
+ moments. Different criteria for the quality of the charges are
+ discussed.},
+}
+
+@article{spiegelberg,
+ author = {Spiegelberg, Herbert},
+ title = {\mkbibquote{Intention} und \mkbibquote{Intentionalit{\"a}t} in
+ der Scholastik, bei Brentano und Husserl},
+ journaltitle = {Studia Philosophica},
+ date = 1969,
+ volume = 29,
+ pages = {189-216},
+ langid = {german},
+ sorttitle = {Intention und Intentionalitat in der Scholastik, bei Brentano
+ und Husserl},
+ indexsorttitle= {Intention und Intentionalitat in der Scholastik, bei Brentano
+ und Husserl},
+ shorttitle = {Intention und Intentionalit{\"a}t},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields and the markup of the quotes in
+ the database file},
+}
+
+@article{springer,
+ author = {Springer, Otto},
+ title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from {Scandinavia} to {Rome}},
+ journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies},
+ date = 1950,
+ volume = 12,
+ pages = {92-122},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes},
+ annotation = {A plain \texttt{article} entry},
+}
+
+@article{weinberg,
+ author = {Weinberg, Steven},
+ title = {A Model of Leptons},
+ journaltitle = {Phys.~Rev.~Lett.},
+ date = 1967,
+ volume = 19,
+ pages = {1264-1266},
+}
+
+@article{yoon,
+ author = {Yoon, Myeong S. and Ryu, Dowook and Kim, Jeongryul and Ahn,
+ Kyo Han},
+ title = {Palladium pincer complexes with reduced bond angle strain:
+ efficient catalysts for the {Heck} reaction},
+ journaltitle = {Organometallics},
+ date = 2006,
+ volume = 25,
+ number = 10,
+ pages = {2409-2411},
+ indextitle = {Palladium pincer complexes},
+}
+
+@book{aristotle:anima,
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ title = {De Anima},
+ date = 1907,
+ editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew},
+ publisher = cup,
+ location = {Cambridge},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an
+ \texttt{editor}},
+}
+
+@book{aristotle:physics,
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ title = {Physics},
+ date = 1929,
+ translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.},
+ publisher = {G. P. Putnam},
+ location = {New York},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ shorttitle = {Physics},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{translator} field},
+}
+
+@book{aristotle:poetics,
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ title = {Poetics},
+ date = 1968,
+ editor = {Lucas, D. W.},
+ series = {Clarendon {Aristotle}},
+ publisher = {Clarendon Press},
+ location = {Oxford},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ shorttitle = {Poetics},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an
+ \texttt{editor} as well as a \texttt{series} field},
+}
+
+@mvbook{aristotle:rhetoric,
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ title = {The Rhetoric of {Aristotle} with a commentary by the late {Edward
+ Meredith Cope}},
+ date = 1877,
+ editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ volumes = 3,
+ publisher = cup,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle},
+ indextitle = {Rhetoric of {Aristotle}, The},
+ shorttitle = {Rhetoric},
+ annotation = {A commented edition. Note the concatenation of the
+ \texttt{editor} and \texttt{commentator} fields as well as the
+ \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle}
+ fields},
+}
+
+@book{augustine,
+ author = {Augustine, Robert L.},
+ title = {Heterogeneous catalysis for the synthetic chemist},
+ date = 1995,
+ publisher = {Marcel Dekker},
+ location = {New York},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ shorttitle = {Heterogeneous catalysis},
+ annotation = {A plain \texttt{book} entry},
+}
+
+@book{averroes/bland,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active
+ Intellect by {Ibn Rushd} with the Commentary of {Moses Narboni}},
+ date = 1982,
+ editor = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ translator = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ series = {Moreshet: Studies in {Jewish} History, Literature and Thought},
+ number = 7,
+ publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America},
+ location = {New York},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The},
+ shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{series} and a
+ \texttt{number}. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor}
+ and \texttt{translator} fields as well as the
+ \texttt{indextitle} field},
+}
+
+@book{averroes/hannes,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \mkbibquote{{\"U}ber die
+ M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion} oder \mkbibquote{{\"U}ber den
+ materiellen Intellekt}},
+ date = 1892,
+ editor = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ translator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
+ location = {Halle an der Saale},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ langid = {german},
+ sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indexsorttitle= {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ shorttitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ annotation = {An annotated edition. Note the concatenation of the
+ \texttt{editor}, \texttt{translator}, and \texttt{annotator}
+ fields. Also note the \texttt{shorttitle},
+ \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields},
+}
+
+@book{averroes/hercz,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten
+ Intellects mit dem Menschen},
+ date = 1869,
+ editor = {Hercz, J.},
+ translator = {Hercz, J.},
+ publisher = {S.~Hermann},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ langid = {german},
+ indexsorttitle= {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction},
+ indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction},
+ subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen
+ {\"u}bersetzt von Samuel Ibn Tibbon},
+ shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the concatenation of the
+ \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields as well as the
+ \texttt{indextitle} and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields},
+}
+
+@book{cicero,
+ author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius},
+ title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter},
+ date = 1995,
+ editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ afterword = {Thraede, Klaus},
+ language = {langlatin and langgerman},
+ publisher = {Reclam},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ langid = {german},
+ indextitle = {De natura deorum},
+ shorttitle = {De natura deorum},
+ annotation = {A bilingual edition of Cicero's \emph{De natura deorum}, with
+ a German translation. Note the format of the \texttt{language}
+ field in the database file, the concatenation of the
+ \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields, and the
+ \texttt{afterword} field},
+}
+
+@book{coleridge,
+ author = {Coleridge, Samuel Taylor},
+ title = {Biographia literaria, or {Biographical} sketches of my literary
+ life and opinions},
+ date = 1983,
+ editor = {Coburn, Kathleen and Engell, James and Bate, W. Jackson},
+ maintitle = {The collected works of {Samuel Taylor Coleridge}},
+ volume = 7,
+ part = 2,
+ series = {Bollingen Series},
+ number = 75,
+ publisher = {Routledge {and} Kegan Paul},
+ location = {London},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ indextitle = {Biographia literaria},
+ shorttitle = {Biographia literaria},
+ annotation = {One (partial) volume of a multivolume book. This is a
+ \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{volume} and a \texttt{part}
+ field which explicitly refers to the second (physical) part of
+ the seventh (logical) volume. Also note the \texttt{series}
+ and \texttt{number} fields},
+}
+
+@book{companion,
+ author = {Goossens, Michel and Mittelbach, Frank and Samarin, Alexander},
+ title = {The {LaTeX} Companion},
+ date = 1994,
+ edition = 1,
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ pagetotal = 528,
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {LaTeX Companion},
+ indextitle = {LaTeX Companion, The},
+ shorttitle = {LaTeX Companion},
+ annotation = {A book with three authors. Note the formatting of the author
+ list. By default, only the first name is reversed in the
+ bibliography},
+}
+
+@book{cotton,
+ author = {Cotton, Frank Albert and Wilkinson, Geoffrey and Murillio,
+ Carlos A. and Bochmann, Manfred},
+ title = {Advanced inorganic chemistry},
+ date = 1999,
+ edition = 6,
+ publisher = {Wiley},
+ location = {Chichester},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with \arabic{author} authors and an
+ \texttt{edition} field. By default, long \texttt{author} and
+ \texttt{editor} lists are automatically truncated. This is
+ configurable},
+}
+
+@book{gerhardt,
+ author = {Gerhardt, Michael J.},
+ title = {The Federal Appointments Process},
+ date = 2000,
+ publisher = {Duke University Press},
+ location = {Durham and London},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Federal Appointments Process},
+ indextitle = {Federal Appointments Process, The},
+ subtitle = {A Constitutional and Historical Analysis},
+ shorttitle = {Federal Appointments Process},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the
+ \texttt{location} field as well as the \texttt{sorttitle} and
+ \texttt{indextitle} fields},
+}
+
+@book{gonzalez,
+ author = {Gonzalez, Ray},
+ title = {The Ghost of {John Wayne} and Other Stories},
+ date = 2001,
+ publisher = {The University of Arizona Press},
+ location = {Tucson},
+ isbn = {0-816-52066-6},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Ghost of John Wayne and Other Stories},
+ indextitle = {Ghost of {John Wayne} and Other Stories, The},
+ shorttitle = {Ghost of {John Wayne}},
+ annotation = {A collection of short stories. This is a \texttt{book} entry.
+ Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields in
+ the database file. There's also an \texttt{isbn} field},
+}
+
+@book{hammond,
+ author = {Hammond, Christopher},
+ title = {The basics of crystallography and diffraction},
+ date = 1997,
+ publisher = {International Union of Crystallography and Oxford University
+ Press},
+ location = {Oxford},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ sorttitle = {Basics of crystallography and diffraction},
+ indextitle = {Basics of crystallography and diffraction, The},
+ shorttitle = {Crystallography and diffraction},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and
+ \texttt{indextitle} fields as well as the format of the
+ \texttt{publisher} field},
+}
+
+@book{iliad,
+ author = {Homer},
+ title = {Die Ilias},
+ date = 2004,
+ translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang},
+ introduction = {Latacz, Joachim},
+ edition = 3,
+ publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler},
+ location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich},
+ langid = {german},
+ sorttitle = {Ilias},
+ indextitle = {Ilias, Die},
+ shorttitle = {Ilias},
+ annotation = {A German translation of the \emph{Iliad}. Note the
+ \texttt{translator} and \texttt{introduction} fields and the
+ format of the \texttt{location} field in the database
+ file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle}
+ fields},
+}
+
+@mvbook{knuth:ct,
+ author = {Knuth, Donald E.},
+ title = {Computers \& Typesetting},
+ date = {1984/1986},
+ volumes = 5,
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Computers & Typesetting},
+ indexsorttitle= {Computers & Typesetting},
+ annotation = {A five-volume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{mvbook}
+ entry, note the \texttt{volumes} field},
+}
+
+@book{knuth:ct:a,
+ author = {Knuth, Donald E.},
+ title = {The {\TeX book}},
+ date = 1984,
+ maintitle = {Computers \& Typesetting},
+ volume = {A},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Computers & Typesetting A},
+ indexsorttitle= {The TeXbook},
+ indextitle = {\protect\TeX book, The},
+ shorttitle = {\TeX book},
+ annotation = {The first volume of a five-volume book. Note the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want this
+ volume to be listed after the entry referring to the entire
+ five-volume set. Also note the \texttt{indextitle} and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields. Indexing packages that don't
+ generate robust index entries require some control sequences
+ to be protected from expansion},
+}
+
+@book{knuth:ct:b,
+ author = {Knuth, Donald E.},
+ title = {{\TeX}: The Program},
+ date = 1986,
+ maintitle = {Computers \& Typesetting},
+ volume = {B},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Computers & Typesetting B},
+ indexsorttitle= {TeX: The Program},
+ shorttitle = {\TeX},
+ annotation = {The second volume of a five-volume book. Note the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} field. Also note the
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} field},
+}
+
+@book{knuth:ct:c,
+ author = {Knuth, Donald E.},
+ title = {The {METAFONTbook}},
+ date = 1986,
+ maintitle = {Computers \& Typesetting},
+ volume = {C},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Computers & Typesetting C},
+ indextitle = {METAFONTbook, The},
+ shorttitle = {METAFONTbook},
+ annotation = {The third volume of a five-volume book. Note the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} field as well as the
+ \texttt{indextitle} field},
+}
+
+@book{knuth:ct:d,
+ author = {Knuth, Donald E.},
+ title = {{METAFONT}: The Program},
+ date = 1986,
+ maintitle = {Computers \& Typesetting},
+ volume = {D},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Computers & Typesetting D},
+ shorttitle = {METAFONT},
+ annotation = {The fourth volume of a five-volume book. Note the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} field},
+}
+
+@book{knuth:ct:e,
+ author = {Knuth, Donald E.},
+ title = {{Computer Modern} Typefaces},
+ date = 1986,
+ maintitle = {Computers \& Typesetting},
+ volume = {E},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Computers & Typesetting E},
+ annotation = {The fifth volume of a five-volume book. Note the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} field},
+}
+
+@mvbook{knuth:ct:related,
+ author = {Knuth, Donald E.},
+ title = {Computers \& Typesetting},
+ date = {1984/1986},
+ volumes = 5,
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ location = {Reading, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Computers & Typesetting},
+ indexsorttitle= {Computers & Typesetting},
+ related = {knuth:ct:a,knuth:ct:b,knuth:ct:c,knuth:ct:d,knuth:ct:e},
+ relatedtype = {multivolume},
+ annotation = {A five-volume book cited as a whole and related to its
+ individual volumes. Note the \texttt{related} and
+ \texttt{relatedtype} fields},
+}
+
+@book{kullback,
+ author = {Kullback, Solomon},
+ title = {Information Theory and Statistics},
+ year = 1959,
+ publisher = {John Wiley \& Sons},
+ location = {New York},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+}
+
+@book{kullback:reprint,
+ author = {Kullback, Solomon},
+ title = {Information Theory and Statistics},
+ year = 1997,
+ publisher = {Dover Publications},
+ location = {New York},
+ origyear = 1959,
+ origpublisher= {John Wiley \& Sons},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {A reprint of the \texttt{kullback} entry. Note the format of
+ \texttt{origyear} and \texttt{origpublisher}. These fields are
+ not used by the standard bibliography styles},
+}
+
+@book{kullback:related,
+ author = {Kullback, Solomon},
+ title = {Information Theory and Statistics},
+ year = 1997,
+ publisher = {Dover Publications},
+ location = {New York},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ related = {kullback},
+ relatedtype = {origpubin},
+ annotation = {A reprint of the \texttt{kullback} entry. Note the format of
+ the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedtype} fields},
+}
+
+@book{malinowski,
+ author = {Malinowski, Bronis{\l}aw},
+ title = {Argonauts of the {Western Pacific}},
+ date = 1972,
+ edition = 8,
+ publisher = {Routledge {and} Kegan Paul},
+ location = {London},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ subtitle = {An account of native enterprise and adventure in the
+ Archipelagoes of {Melanesian New Guinea}},
+ shorttitle = {Argonauts},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the
+ \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{edition} fields as well as the
+ \texttt{subtitle} field},
+}
+
+@book{maron,
+ author = {Maron, Monika},
+ title = {Animal Triste},
+ date = 2000,
+ translator = {Brigitte Goldstein},
+ origlanguage = {german},
+ publisher = {University of Nebraska Press},
+ location = {Lincoln},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ shorttitle = {Animal Triste},
+ annotation = {An English translation of a German novel with a French title.
+ In other words: a \texttt{book} entry with a
+ \texttt{translator} field. Note the \texttt{origlanguage}
+ field which is concatenated with the \texttt{translator}},
+}
+
+@book{massa,
+ author = {Werner Massa},
+ title = {Crystal structure determination},
+ date = 2004,
+ edition = 2,
+ publisher = {Spinger},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{edition} field},
+}
+
+@article{moore,
+ author = {Moore, Gordon E.},
+ title = {Cramming more components onto integrated circuits},
+ journaltitle = {Electronics},
+ year = 1965,
+ volume = 38,
+ number = 8,
+ pages = {114-117},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+}
+
+@article{moore:related,
+ author = {Moore, Gordon E.},
+ title = {Cramming more components onto integrated circuits},
+ journaltitle = {Proceedings of the {IEEE}},
+ year = 1998,
+ volume = 86,
+ number = 1,
+ pages = {82-85},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ related = {moore},
+ relatedtype = {reprintfrom},
+ annotation = {A reprint of Moore's law. Note the \texttt{related} and
+ \texttt{relatedtype} fields},
+}
+
+@mvbook{nietzsche:ksa,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ date = 1988,
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ edition = 2,
+ volumes = 15,
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ langid = {german},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-00-000},
+ indexsorttitle= {Samtliche Werke},
+ subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ annotation = {The critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This is a
+ \texttt{mvbook} entry referring to a 15-volume work as a
+ whole. Note the \texttt{volumes} field and the format of the
+ \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{location} fields in the
+ database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and
+ field which is used to fine-tune the
+ sorting order of the bibliography. We want this item listed
+ first in the bibliography},
+}
+
+@book{nietzsche:ksa1,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e
+ Betrachtungen I--IV. Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ date = 1988,
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volume = 1,
+ edition = 2,
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ langid = {german},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-000},
+ indexsorttitle= {Samtliche Werke I},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ annotation = {A single volume from the critical edition of Nietzsche's
+ works. This \texttt{book} entry explicitly refers to the first
+ volume only. Note the \texttt{title} and \texttt{maintitle}
+ fields. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle}
+ field. We want this entry to be listed after the entry
+ referring to the entire edition},
+}
+
+@book{nussbaum,
+ author = {Nussbaum, Martha},
+ title = {Aristotle's \mkbibquote{De Motu Animalium}},
+ date = 1978,
+ publisher = pup,
+ location = {Princeton},
+ keywords = {secondary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Aristotle's De Motu Animalium},
+ indexsorttitle= {Aristotle's De Motu Animalium},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields and the markup of the quotes in
+ the database file},
+}
+
+@book{piccato,
+ author = {Piccato, Pablo},
+ title = {City of Suspects},
+ date = 2001,
+ publisher = {Duke University Press},
+ location = {Durham and London},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ subtitle = {Crime in {Mexico City}, 1900--1931},
+ shorttitle = {City of Suspects},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the
+ \texttt{location} field in the database file},
+}
+
+@book{vangennep,
+ author = {van Gennep, Arnold},
+ title = {Les rites de passage},
+ date = 1909,
+ publisher = {Nourry},
+ location = {Paris},
+ options = {useprefix},
+ langid = {french},
+ sorttitle = {Rites de passage},
+ indextitle = {Rites de passage, Les},
+ shorttitle = {Rites de passage},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the printed name and
+ compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in the \texttt{options}
+ field as well as \texttt{brandt} and \texttt{geer}},
+}
+
+@book{vangennep:trans,
+ author = {van Gennep, Arnold},
+ title = {The Rites of Passage},
+ year = 1960,
+ translator = {Vizedom, Monika B. and Caffee, Gabrielle L.},
+ language = {english},
+ origlanguage = {french},
+ publisher = {University of Chicago Press},
+ options = {useprefix},
+ indextitle = {Rites of Passage, The},
+ sorttitle = {Rites of Passage},
+ shorttitle = {Rites of Passage},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {A translation of the \texttt{vangennep} entry. Note the
+ \texttt{translator} and \texttt{origlanguage} fields. Compare
+ with the \texttt{vangennep:related} entry.},
+}
+
+@book{vangennep:related,
+ author = {van Gennep, Arnold},
+ title = {Les rites de passage},
+ date = 1909,
+ publisher = {Nourry},
+ location = {Paris},
+ options = {useprefix},
+ langid = {french},
+ related = {vizedom:related},
+ relatedtype = {bytranslator},
+ sorttitle = {Rites de passage},
+ indextitle = {Rites de passage, Les},
+ shorttitle = {Rites de passage},
+ annotation = {A variant of the \texttt{vangennep} entry related to its
+ translation. Note the format of the \texttt{related} and
+ \texttt{relatedtype} fields},
+}
+
+@book{vizedom:related,
+ title = {The Rites of Passage},
+ year = 1960,
+ translator = {Vizedom, Monika B. and Caffee, Gabrielle L.},
+ language = {english},
+ publisher = {University of Chicago Press},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ options = {usetranslator},
+ related = {vangennep},
+ relatedtype = {translationof},
+ indextitle = {Rites of Passage, The},
+ sorttitle = {Rites of Passage},
+ shorttitle = {Rites of Passage},
+ annotation = {A translated work from \texttt{vangennep}. Note the format of
+ the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedtype} fields},
+}
+
+@mvbook{vazques-de-parga,
+ author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a
+ and Ur{\'i}a R{\'i}u, Juan},
+ title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ date = 1993,
+ volumes = 3,
+ note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49},
+ publisher = {Iberdrola},
+ location = {Pamplona},
+ langid = {spanish},
+ sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las},
+ shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones},
+ annotation = {A multivolume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{mvbook}
+ entry with \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note},
+ \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle} fields},
+}
+
+@book{wilde,
+ author = {Wilde, Oscar},
+ title = {The Importance of Being Earnest: A Trivial Comedy for Serious
+ People},
+ year = 1899,
+ series = {English and {American} drama of the Nineteenth Century},
+ publisher = {Leonard Smithers {and} Company},
+ eprint = {4HIWAAAAYAAJ},
+ eprinttype = {googlebooks},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} with \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype}
+ fields.},
+}
+
+@book{worman,
+ author = {Worman, Nancy},
+ title = {The Cast of Character},
+ date = 2002,
+ publisher = {University of Texas Press},
+ location = {Austin},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Cast of Character},
+ indextitle = {Cast of Character, The},
+ subtitle = {Style in {Greek} Literature},
+ shorttitle = {Cast of Character},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and
+ \texttt{indextitle} fields},
+}
+
+@mvcollection{britannica,
+ editor = {Preece, Warren E.},
+ title = {The {New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}},
+ date = 2003,
+ edition = 15,
+ volumes = 32,
+ publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ location = {Chicago, Ill.},
+ options = {useeditor=false},
+ label = {EB},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ indextitle = {{Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}, The {New}},
+ shorttitle = {{Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{mvcollection} entry for an encyclopedia. Note
+ the \texttt{useeditor} option in the \texttt{options} field as
+ well as the \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want this entry to be
+ cited and alphabetized by title even though there is an
+ editor. In addition to that, we want the title to be
+ alphabetized under \enquote*{E} rather than \enquote*{T}. Also
+ note the \texttt{label} field which is provided for
+ author-year citation styles},
+}
+
+@collection{gaonkar,
+ editor = {Gaonkar, Dilip Parameshwar},
+ title = {Alternative Modernities},
+ date = 2001,
+ publisher = {Duke University Press},
+ location = {Durham and London},
+ isbn = {0-822-32714-7},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{collection} entry. Note the format of the
+ \texttt{location} field in the database file as well as the
+ \texttt{isbn} field},
+}
+
+@incollection{gaonkar:in,
+ author = {Gaonkar, Dilip Parameshwar},
+ editor = {Gaonkar, Dilip Parameshwar},
+ title = {On Alternative Modernities},
+ date = 2001,
+ booktitle = {Alternative Modernities},
+ publisher = {Duke University Press},
+ location = {Durham and London},
+ isbn = {0-822-32714-7},
+ pages = {1-23},
+}
+
+@mvcollection{jaffe,
+ editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp},
+ title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post
+ Christum natum \textsc{mcxcviii}},
+ date = {1885/1888},
+ editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald,
+ Paul},
+ edition = 2,
+ volumes = 2,
+ location = {Leipzig},
+ langid = {latin},
+ editoratype = {redactor},
+ indextitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+ shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{mvcollection} entry with \texttt{edition} and
+ \texttt{volumes} fields. Note the \texttt{editora} and
+ \texttt{editoratype} fields},
+}
+
+% booktitle and booksubtitle are only needed for BibTeX's less sophisticated
+% inheritance set-up to make sure westfahl:space shows correctly.
+% With Biber they are not needed.
+@collection{westfahl:frontier,
+ editor = {Westfahl, Gary},
+ title = {Space and Beyond},
+ date = 2000,
+ subtitle = {The Frontier Theme in Science Fiction},
+ publisher = {Greenwood},
+ location = {Westport, Conn. and London},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ booktitle = {Space and Beyond},
+ booksubtitle = {The Frontier Theme in Science Fiction},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{collection} entry. Note the format of the
+ \texttt{location} field as well as the \texttt{subtitle}
+ field},
+}
+
+@inbook{kant:kpv,
+ title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ date = 1968,
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ volume = 5,
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ pages = {1-163},
+ shorthand = {KpV},
+ langid = {german},
+ shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This
+ is an \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the
+ \emph{Critique of Practical Reason} only, not to the entire
+ fifth volume. Note the \texttt{author} and \texttt{bookauthor}
+ fields in the database file. By default, the
+ \texttt{bookauthor} is omitted if the values of the
+ \texttt{author} and \texttt{bookauthor} fields are identical},
+}
+
+@inbook{kant:ku,
+ title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ date = 1968,
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ volume = 5,
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ pages = {165-485},
+ shorthand = {KU},
+ langid = {german},
+ annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This
+ is an \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the
+ \emph{Critique of Judgment} only, not to the entire fifth
+ volume},
+}
+
+@inbook{nietzsche:historie,
+ title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck},
+ date = 1988,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e
+ Betrachtungen I--IV. Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volume = 1,
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ pages = {243-334},
+ langid = {german},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-243},
+ indexsorttitle= {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben},
+ indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie},
+ annotation = {A single essay from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works.
+ This \texttt{inbook} entry explicitly refers to an essay found
+ in the first volume. Note the \texttt{title},
+ \texttt{booktitle}, and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also note
+ the \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want
+ this entry to be listed after the entry referring to the
+ entire first volume},
+}
+
+@incollection{brandt,
+ author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann},
+ editor = {Ferdinand Seibt},
+ title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts
+ bis 1448},
+ date = 1987,
+ booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter},
+ series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte},
+ number = 2,
+ publisher = {Klett-Cotta},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ pages = {884-917},
+ options = {useprefix=false},
+ langid = {german},
+ indexsorttitle= {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis
+ 1448},
+ indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis
+ 1448, Die},
+ shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and a
+ \texttt{number}. Note the format of the printed name and
+ compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in the \texttt{options}
+ field as well as \texttt{vangennep}. Also note the
+ \texttt{indextitle, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}},
+}
+
+@incollection{hyman,
+ author = {Arthur Hyman},
+ editor = {O'Meara, Dominic J.},
+ title = {Aristotle's Theory of the Intellect and its Interpretation by
+ {Averroes}},
+ date = 1981,
+ booktitle = {Studies in {Aristotle}},
+ series = {Studies in Philosophy and the History of Philosophy},
+ number = 9,
+ publisher = {The Catholic University of America Press},
+ location = {Washington, D.C.},
+ pages = {161-191},
+ keywords = {secondary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ indextitle = {Aristotle's Theory of the Intellect},
+ shorttitle = {Aristotle's Theory of the Intellect},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and
+ \texttt{number} field},
+}
+
+@incollection{pines,
+ author = {Pines, Shlomo},
+ editor = {Twersky, Isadore},
+ title = {The Limitations of Human Knowledge According to {Al-Farabi}, {ibn
+ Bajja}, and {Maimonides}},
+ date = 1979,
+ booktitle = {Studies in Medieval {Jewish} History and Literature},
+ publisher = hup,
+ location = {Cambridge, Mass.},
+ pages = {82-109},
+ keywords = {secondary},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ indextitle = {Limitations of Human Knowledge According to {Al-Farabi}, {ibn
+ Bajja}, and {Maimonides}, The},
+ shorttitle = {Limitations of Human Knowledge},
+ annotation = {A typical \texttt{incollection} entry. Note the
+ \texttt{indextitle} field},
+}
+
+@inproceedings{moraux,
+ author = {Moraux, Paul},
+ editor = {Lloyd, G. E. R. and Owen, G. E. L.},
+ title = {Le \emph{De Anima} dans la tradition gr{\`e}cque},
+ date = 1979,
+ booktitle = {Aristotle on Mind and the Senses},
+ subtitle = {Quelques aspects de l'interpretation du trait{\'e}, de
+ Theophraste {\`a} Themistius},
+ booktitleaddon= {Proceedings of the Seventh Symposium Aristotelicum},
+ eventdate = 1975,
+ publisher = cup,
+ location = {Cambridge},
+ pages = {281-324},
+ keywords = {secondary},
+ langid = {french},
+ indexsorttitle= {De Anima dans la tradition grecque},
+ indextitle = {\emph{De Anima} dans la tradition gr{\`e}cque, Le},
+ shorttitle = {\emph{De Anima} dans la tradition gr{\`e}cque},
+ annotation = {This is a typical \texttt{inproceedings} entry. Note the
+ \texttt{booksubtitle}, \texttt{shorttitle},
+ \texttt{indextitle}, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields. Also
+ note the \texttt{eventdate} field.},
+}
+
+@inproceedings{salam,
+ author = {Salam, Abdus},
+ editor = {Svartholm, Nils},
+ title = {Weak and Electromagnetic Interactions},
+ date = 1968,
+ booktitle = {Elementary particle theory},
+ booksubtitle = {Relativistic groups and analyticity},
+ booktitleaddon= {Proceedings of the {Eighth Nobel Symposium}},
+ eventdate = {1968-05-19/1968-05-25},
+ venue = {Aspen{\"a}sgarden, Lerum},
+ publisher = {Almquist \& Wiksell},
+ location = {Stockholm},
+ pages = {367-377},
+}
+
+@manual{cms,
+ title = {The {Chicago} Manual of Style},
+ date = 2003,
+ subtitle = {The Essential Guide for Writers, Editors, and Publishers},
+ edition = 15,
+ publisher = {University of Chicago Press},
+ location = {Chicago, Ill.},
+ isbn = {0-226-10403-6},
+ label = {CMS},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Chicago Manual of Style},
+ indextitle = {Chicago Manual of Style, The},
+ shorttitle = {Chicago Manual of Style},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{manual} entry without an \texttt{author} or
+ \texttt{editor}. Note the \texttt{label} field in the database
+ file which is provided for author-year citation styles. Also
+ note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields. By
+ default, all entries without an \texttt{author} or
+ \texttt{editor} are alphabetized by \texttt{title} but we want
+ this entry to be alphabetized under \enquote*{C} rather than
+ \enquote*{T}. There's also an \texttt{isbn} field},
+}
+
+@online{baez/online,
+ author = {Baez, John C. and Lauda, Aaron D.},
+ title = {Higher-Dimensional Algebra {V}: 2-Groups},
+ date = {2004-10-27},
+ version = 3,
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ eprinttype = {arxiv},
+ eprint = {math/0307200v3},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{online} reference from arXiv. Note the
+ \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype} fields. Compare
+ \texttt{baez\slash article} which is the same item given as an
+ \texttt{article} entry with eprint information},
+}
+
+@online{ctan,
+ title = {CTAN},
+ date = 2006,
+ url = {http://www.ctan.org},
+ subtitle = {The {Comprehensive TeX Archive Network}},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ label = {CTAN},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {This is an \texttt{online} entry. The \textsc{url}, which is
+ given in the \texttt{url} field, is transformed into a
+ clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been
+ enabled. Note the format of the \texttt{urldate} field
+ (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file. Also note the
+ \texttt{label} field which may be used as a fallback by
+ citation styles which need an \texttt{author} and\slash or a
+ \texttt{year}},
+}
+
+@online{itzhaki,
+ author = {Itzhaki, Nissan},
+ title = {Some remarks on {'t Hooft's} {S}-matrix for black holes},
+ date = {1996-03-11},
+ version = 1,
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ eprinttype = {arxiv},
+ eprint = {hep-th/9603067},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{online} reference from arXiv. Note the
+ \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype} fields. Also note that
+ the arXiv reference is transformed into a clickable link if
+ \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled},
+ abstract = {We discuss the limitations of 't Hooft's proposal for the
+ black hole S-matrix. We find that the validity of the S-matrix
+ implies violation of the semi-classical approximation at
+ scales large compared to the Planck scale. We also show that
+ the effect of the centrifugal barrier on the S-matrix is
+ crucial even for large transverse distances.},
+}
+
+@online{markey,
+ author = {Markey, Nicolas},
+ title = {Tame the {BeaST}},
+ date = {2005-10-16},
+ url = {http://mirror.ctan.org/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf},
+ subtitle = {The {B} to {X} of {BibTeX}},
+ version = {1.3},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Tame the Beast},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{online} entry for a tutorial. Note the format of
+ the \texttt{date} field (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database
+ file.},
+}
+
+@online{wassenberg,
+ author = {Wassenberg, Jan and Sanders, Peter},
+ title = {Faster Radix Sort via Virtual Memory and Write-Combining},
+ date = {2010-08-17},
+ version = 1,
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ eprinttype = {arxiv},
+ eprintclass = {cs.DS},
+ eprint = {1008.2849v1},
+ annotation = {A recent \texttt{online} reference from arXiv using the new
+ (April 2007 onward) identifier format. Note the
+ \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{eprinttype}, and \texttt{eprintclass}
+ fields. Also note that the arXiv reference is transformed into
+ a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been
+ enabled},
+ abstract = {Sorting algorithms are the deciding factor for the performance
+ of common operations such as removal of duplicates or database
+ sort-merge joins. This work focuses on 32-bit integer keys,
+ optionally paired with a 32-bit value. We present a fast radix
+ sorting algorithm that builds upon a microarchitecture-aware
+ variant of counting sort},
+}
+
+@patent{almendro,
+ author = {Almendro, Jos{\'e} L. and Mart{\'i}n, Jacinto and S{\'a}nchez,
+ Alberto and Nozal, Fernando},
+ title = {Elektromagnetisches Signalhorn},
+ number = {EU-29702195U},
+ date = 1998,
+ location = {countryfr and countryuk and countryde},
+ langid = {german},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{patent} entry with a \texttt{location}
+ field. The number is given in the \texttt{number} field. Note
+ the format of the \texttt{location} field in the database
+ file. Compare \texttt{laufenberg}, \texttt{sorace}, and
+ \texttt{kowalik}},
+}
+
+@patent{kowalik,
+ author = {Kowalik, F. and Isard, M.},
+ title = {Estimateur d'un d{\'e}faut de fonctionnement d'un modulateur
+ en quadrature et {\'e}tage de modulation l'utilisant},
+ number = 9500261,
+ date = {1995-01-11},
+ type = {patreqfr},
+ langid = {french},
+ indextitle = {Estimateur d'un d{\'e}faut de fonctionnement},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{patent} entry for a French patent request
+ with a full date. The number is given in the \texttt{number}
+ field. Note the format of the \texttt{type} and \texttt{date}
+ fields in the database file. Compare \texttt{almendro},
+ \texttt{laufenberg}, and \texttt{sorace}},
+}
+
+@patent{laufenberg,
+ author = {Laufenberg, Xaver and Eynius, Dominique and Suelzle, Helmut
+ and Usbeck, Stephan and Spaeth, Matthias and Neuser-Hoffmann,
+ Miriam and Myrzik, Christian and Schmid, Manfred and Nietfeld,
+ Franz and Thiel, Alexander and Braun, Harald and Ebner,
+ Norbert},
+ title = {Elektrische Einrichtung und Betriebsverfahren},
+ number = 1700367,
+ date = {2006-09-13},
+ holder = {{Robert Bosch GmbH} and {Daimler Chrysler AG} and {Bayerische
+ Motoren Werke AG}},
+ type = {patenteu},
+ langid = {german},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{patent} entry with a \texttt{holder} field.
+ Note the format of the \texttt{type} and \texttt{location}
+ fields in the database file. Compare \texttt{almendro},
+ \texttt{sorace}, and \texttt{kowalik}},
+ abstract = {The invention relates to an electric device comprising a
+ generator, in particular for use in the vehicle electric
+ system of a motor vehicle and a controller for controlling the
+ generator voltage. The device is equipped with a control zone,
+ in which the voltage is controlled and zones, in which the
+ torque is controlled. The invention also relates to methods
+ for operating a device of this type.},
+ file = {http://v3.espacenet.com/textdoc?IDX=EP1700367},
+}
+
+@patent{sorace,
+ author = {Sorace, Ronald E. and Reinhardt, Victor S. and Vaughn, Steven
+ A.},
+ title = {High-Speed Digital-to-{RF} Converter},
+ number = 5668842,
+ date = {1997-09-16},
+ holder = {{Hughes Aircraft Company}},
+ type = {patentus},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{patent} entry with a \texttt{holder} field.
+ Note the format of the \texttt{type} and \texttt{date} fields
+ in the database file. Compare \texttt{almendro},
+ \texttt{laufenberg}, and \texttt{kowalik}},
+}
+
+@periodical{jcg,
+ title = {Computers and Graphics},
+ year = 2011,
+ issuetitle = {Semantic {3D} Media and Content},
+ volume = 35,
+ number = 4,
+ issn = {0097-8493},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{periodical} entry with an \texttt{issn}
+ field.},
+}
+
+@report{chiu,
+ author = {Chiu, Willy W. and Chow, We Min},
+ title = {A Hybrid Hierarchical Model of a {Multiple Virtual Storage}
+ ({MVS}) Operating System},
+ type = {resreport},
+ institution = {IBM},
+ date = 1978,
+ number = {RC-6947},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {Hybrid Hierarchical Model of a Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS)
+ Operating System},
+ indextitle = {Hybrid Hierarchical Model, A},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{report} entry for a research report. Note
+ the format of the \texttt{type} field in the database file
+ which uses a localization key. The number of the report is
+ given in the \texttt{number} field. Also note the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields},
+}
+
+@report{padhye,
+ author = {Padhye, Jitendra and Firoiu, Victor and Towsley, Don},
+ title = {A Stochastic Model of {TCP Reno} Congestion Avoidance and
+ Control},
+ type = {techreport},
+ institution = {University of Massachusetts},
+ date = 1999,
+ number = {99-02},
+ location = {Amherst, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ sorttitle = {A Stochastic Model of TCP Reno Congestion Avoidance and
+ Control},
+ indextitle = {Stochastic Model of {TCP Reno} Congestion Avoidance and Control,
+ A},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{report} entry for a technical report. Note
+ the format of the \texttt{type} field in the database file
+ which uses a localization key. The number of the report is
+ given in the \texttt{number} field. Also note the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields},
+ abstract = {The steady state performance of a bulk transfer TCP flow
+ (i.e. a flow with a large amount of data to send, such as FTP
+ transfers) may be characterized by three quantities. The first
+ is the send rate, which is the amount of data sent by the
+ sender in unit time. The second is the throughput, which is
+ the amount of data received by the receiver in unit time. Note
+ that the throughput will always be less than or equal to the
+ send rate due to losses. Finally, the number of non-duplicate
+ packets received by the receiver in unit time gives us the
+ goodput of the connection. The goodput is always less than or
+ equal to the throughput, since the receiver may receive two
+ copies of the same packet due to retransmissions by the
+ sender. In a previous paper, we presented a simple model for
+ predicting the steady state send rate of a bulk transfer TCP
+ flow as a function of loss rate and round trip time. In this
+ paper, we extend that work in two ways. First, we analyze the
+ performance of bulk transfer TCP flows using more precise,
+ stochastic analysis. Second, we build upon the previous
+ analysis to provide both an approximate formula as well as a
+ more accurate stochastic model for the steady state throughput
+ of a bulk transfer TCP flow.},
+ file = {ftp://gaia.cs.umass.edu/pub/Padhey99-markov.ps},
+}
+
+@thesis{geer,
+ author = {de Geer, Ingrid},
+ title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music},
+ type = {phdthesis},
+ institution = {Uppsala Universitet},
+ date = 1985,
+ subtitle = {The {Orkney Earldom} of the Twelfth Century. {A} Musicological
+ Study},
+ location = {Uppsala},
+ options = {useprefix=false},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=british},
+ annotation = {This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for a PhD thesis. Note
+ the \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a
+ localization key. Also note the format of the printed name and
+ compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in the \texttt{options}
+ field as well as \texttt{vangennep}},
+}
+
+@thesis{loh,
+ author = {Loh, Nin C.},
+ title = {High-Resolution Micromachined Interferometric Accelerometer},
+ type = {mathesis},
+ institution = {Massachusetts Institute of Technology},
+ date = 1992,
+ location = {Cambridge, Mass.},
+ langid = {english},
+ langidopts = {variant=american},
+ annotation = {This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for an MA thesis. Note
+ the \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a
+ localization key},
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bltxml b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bltxml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b1d49c2e1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/examples/biblatex-examples.bltxml
@@ -0,0 +1,2840 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml-model href="biblatex-examples.rng" type="application/xml" schematypens="http://relaxng.org/ns/structure/1.0"?>
+<!-- Auto-generated by Biber::Output::biblatexml -->
+
+<bltx:entries xmlns:bltx="http://biblatex-biber.sourceforge.net/biblatexml">
+ <bltx:entry id="bulgakov" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="М">Михаи́л</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="patronymic" initial="А">Афана́сьевич</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="Б">Булга́ков</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:title>Мастер и Маргарита</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1966</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="westfahl:space" entrytype="incollection">
+ <bltx:crossref>westfahl:frontier</bltx:crossref>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Westfahl</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="G">Gary</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>A cross-referenced article from a \texttt{collection}. This is an \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{crossref} field. Note the \texttt{subtitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:crossref>westfahl:frontier</bltx:crossref>
+ <bltx:indextitle>True Frontier, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Confronting and Avoiding the Realities of Space in {American} Science Fiction Films</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>The True Frontier</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>55</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>65</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="set" entrytype="set">
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{set} with three members. The \texttt{crossref} field in the \texttt{@set} entry and the \texttt{entryset} field in each set member entry is needed only when using BibTeX as the backend</bltx:annotation>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="stdmodel" entrytype="set">
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{set} with three members discussing the standard model of particle physics. The \texttt{crossref} field in the \texttt{@set} entry and the \texttt{entryset} field in each set member entry is needed only when using BibTeX as the backend</bltx:annotation>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="aksin" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Aksın</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="Ö">Özge</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="T">Türkmen</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="H">Hayati</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Artok</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="L">Levent</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="Ç">Çetinkaya</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="B">Bekir</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Ni</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="C">Chaoying</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Büyükgüngör</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="O">Orhan</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="Ö">Özkal</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="E">Erhan</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>J.~Organomet. Chem.</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:number>13</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics of saturated {Pd-N}-heterocyclic carbenes in {Mizoroki-Heck} reactions</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>691</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>3027</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>3036</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>2006</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="angenendt" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Angenendt</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Arnold</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>A German article in a French journal. Apart from that, a typical \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{indextitle} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>In Honore Salvatoris</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Revue d'Histoire Ecclésiastique</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>In Honore Salvatoris</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>97</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>431</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>456</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>791</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>823</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>2002</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="baez/article" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Baez</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">John</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="C">C.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Lauda</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">Aaron</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">D.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} with \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype} fields. Note that the arXiv reference is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled. Compare \texttt{baez\slash online}, which is the same item given as an \texttt{online} entry</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:eprint>math/0307200v3</bltx:eprint>
+ <bltx:eprinttype>arxiv</bltx:eprinttype>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Theory and Applications of Categories</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Higher-Dimensional Algebra {V}: 2-Groups</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:version>3</bltx:version>
+ <bltx:volume>12</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>423</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>491</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>2004</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="bertram" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Bertram</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Aaron</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Wentworth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="R">Richard</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with a \texttt{volume} and a \texttt{number} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>J.~Amer. Math. Soc.</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>2</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Gromov invariants</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Gromov invariants for holomorphic maps on {Riemann} surfaces</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>9</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>529</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>571</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1996</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="doody" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="D">Doody</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="T">Terrence</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry cited as an excerpt from a \texttt{collection} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedstring} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>The Journal of Narrative Technique</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>3</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:relatedstring>\autocap{e}xcerpt in</bltx:relatedstring>
+ <bltx:title>Hemingway's Style and {Jake's} Narration</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>4</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>212</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>225</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1974</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="matuz:doody" entrytype="collection">
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Matuz</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="R">Roger</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Detroit</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Gale</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{collection} entry providing the excerpt information for the \texttt{doody} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{pages} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Contemporary Literary Criticism</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>61</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>204</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>208</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1990</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="gillies" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gillies</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Alexander</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{volume} field. Note that format of the \texttt{series} field in the database file</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Publications of the English Goethe Society</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:series>newseries</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:title>Herder and the Preparation of {Goethe's} Idea of World Literature</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>9</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>46</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>67</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1933</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="glashow" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Glashow</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Sheldon</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Nucl.~Phys.</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:title>Partial Symmetries of Weak Interactions</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>22</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>579</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>588</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1961</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="herrmann" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Herrmann</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">Wolfgang</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">A.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="Ö">Öfele</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="K">Karl</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Schneider</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="S">Sabine</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="K">K.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Herdtweck</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="E">Eberhardt</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hoffmann</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="S">Stephan</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">D.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst, A</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Angew.~Chem. Int.~Ed.</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:number>23</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>A carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst ligand for {C--C} coupling reactions</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>45</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>3859</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>3862</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>2006</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="kastenholz" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kastenholz</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">M.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">A.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hünenberger</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="P">Philippe</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="H">H.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:abstract>The computation of ionic solvation free energies from atomistic simulations is a surprisingly difficult problem that has found no satisfactory solution for more than 15 years. The reason is that the charging free energies evaluated from such simulations are affected by very large errors. One of these is related to the choice of a specific convention for summing up the contributions of solvent charges to the electrostatic potential in the ionic cavity, namely, on the basis of point charges within entire solvent molecules (M scheme) or on the basis of individual point charges (P scheme). The use of an inappropriate convention may lead to a charge-independent offset in the calculated potential, which depends on the details of the summation scheme, on the quadrupole-moment trace of the solvent molecule, and on the approximate form used to represent electrostatic interactions in the system. However, whether the M or P scheme (if any) represents the appropriate convention is still a matter of on-going debate. The goal of the present article is to settle this long-standing controversy by carefully analyzing (both analytically and numerically) the properties of the electrostatic potential in molecular liquids (and inside cavities within them).</bltx:abstract>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with an \texttt{eid} and a \texttt{doi} field. Note that the \textsc{doi} is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:doi>10.1063/1.2172593</bltx:doi>
+ <bltx:eid>124106</bltx:eid>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Computation of ionic solvation free energies</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>J.~Chem. Phys.</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:subtitle>{I}. {The} electrostatic potential in molecular liquids</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Computation of methodology\hyphen independent ionic solvation free energies from molecular simulations</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>124</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>2006</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="murray" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hostetler</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Michael</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Wingate</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">Julia</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="Z">Zhong</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="C-J">Chuan-Jian</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Harris</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">Jay</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="V">Vachet</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">Richard</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">W.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Clark</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Michael</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">R.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Londono</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">David</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Green</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="S">Stephen</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Stokes</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">Jennifer</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Wignall</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">George</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">D.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Glish</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">Gary</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="L">L.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="P">Porter</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Marc</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">D.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="E">Evans</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="N">Neal</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">D.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Murray</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">Royce</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">W.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with \arabic{author} authors. By default, long author and editor lists are automatically truncated. This is configurable</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Alkanethiolate gold cluster molecules</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Langmuir</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>1</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Alkanethiolate gold cluster molecules</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Core and monolayer properties as a function of core size</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Alkanethiolate gold cluster molecules with core diameters from 1.5 to 5.2~{nm}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>14</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>17</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>30</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1998</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="reese" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="R">Reese</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="T">Trevor</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">R.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{volume} field. Note the format of the series. If the value of the \texttt{series} field is an integer, this number is printed as an ordinal and the string \enquote*{series} is appended automatically</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>William and Mary Quarterly</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:series>3</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:title>Georgia in {Anglo-Spanish} Diplomacy, 1736--1739</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>15</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>168</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>190</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1958</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="sarfraz" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Sarfraz</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">M.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="R">Razzak</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">M.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="F">F.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">A.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with an \texttt{issn} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:issn>0097-8493</bltx:issn>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Computers and Graphics</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:number>5</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Technical section: {An} algorithm for automatic capturing of the font outlines</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>26</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>795</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>804</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>2002</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="shore" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Shore</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="B">Bradd</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with \texttt{series}, \texttt{volume}, and \texttt{number} fields. Note the format of the \texttt{series} which is a localization key</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>American Anthropologist</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:number>1</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:series>newseries</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Meaning Construction and Cultural Cognition</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Twice-Born, Once Conceived</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>93</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>9</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>27</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1991-03</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="sigfridsson" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Sigfridsson</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="E">Emma</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="R">Ryde</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="U">Ulf</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:abstract>Four methods for deriving partial atomic charges from the quantum chemical electrostatic potential (CHELP, CHELPG, Merz-Kollman, and RESP) have been compared and critically evaluated. It is shown that charges strongly depend on how and where the potential points are selected. Two alternative methods are suggested to avoid the arbitrariness in the point-selection schemes and van der Waals exclusion radii: CHELP-BOW, which also estimates the charges from the electrostatic potential, but with potential points that are Boltzmann-weighted after their occurrence in actual simulations using the energy function of the program in which the charges will be used, and CHELMO, which estimates the charges directly from the electrostatic multipole moments. Different criteria for the quality of the charges are discussed.</bltx:abstract>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry with \texttt{volume}, \texttt{number}, and \texttt{doi} fields. Note that the \textsc{doi} is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:doi>10.1002/(SICI)1096-987X(199803)19:4&lt;377::AID-JCC1&gt;3.0.CO;2-P</bltx:doi>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Methods for deriving atomic charges</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Journal of Computational Chemistry</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>4</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Comparison of methods for deriving atomic charges from the electrostatic potential and moments</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>19</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>377</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>395</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1998</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="spiegelberg" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Spiegelberg</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="H">Herbert</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields and the markup of the quotes in the database file</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Intention und Intentionalitat in der Scholastik, bei Brentano und Husserl</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Studia Philosophica</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Intention und Intentionalität</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Intention und Intentionalitat in der Scholastik, bei Brentano und Husserl</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>\mkbibquote{Intention} und \mkbibquote{Intentionalität} in der Scholastik, bei Brentano und Husserl</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>29</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>189</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>216</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1969</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="springer" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Springer</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="O">Otto</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>A plain \texttt{article} entry</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Mediaeval Studies</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from {Scandinavia} to {Rome}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>12</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>92</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>122</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1950</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="weinberg" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Weinberg</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Steven</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Phys.~Rev.~Lett.</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:title>A Model of Leptons</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>19</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>1264</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>1266</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1967</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="yoon" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="Y">Yoon</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Myeong</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="S">S.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="R">Ryu</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="D">Dowook</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kim</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">Jeongryul</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Ahn</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="K">Kyo</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="H">Han</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Palladium pincer complexes</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Organometallics</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:number>10</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Palladium pincer complexes with reduced bond angle strain: efficient catalysts for the {Heck} reaction</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>25</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>2409</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>2411</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>2006</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="aristotle:anima" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Aristotle</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hicks</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">Robert</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Drew</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Cambridge</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Cambridge University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>De Anima</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1907</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="aristotle:physics" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Aristotle</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Wicksteed</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="P">P.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="H">H.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Cornford</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="F">F.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">M.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>G. P. Putnam</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{translator} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Physics</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Physics</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1929</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="aristotle:poetics" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Aristotle</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Lucas</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">D.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">W.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Oxford</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Clarendon Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor} as well as a \texttt{series} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:series>Clarendon {Aristotle}</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Poetics</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Poetics</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1968</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="aristotle:rhetoric" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Aristotle</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="commentator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Cope</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">Edward</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Meredith</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Cope</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">Edward</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Meredith</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Cambridge University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A commented edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{commentator} fields as well as the \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Rhetoric of {Aristotle}, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Rhetoric</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Rhetoric of Aristotle</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Rhetoric of {Aristotle} with a commentary by the late {Edward Meredith Cope}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volumes>3</bltx:volumes>
+ <bltx:date>1877</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="augustine" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Augustine</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">Robert</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="L">L.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Marcel Dekker</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A plain \texttt{book} entry</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Heterogeneous catalysis</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Heterogeneous catalysis for the synthetic chemist</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1995</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="averroes/bland" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Averroes</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Bland</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="K">Kalman</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="P">P.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Bland</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="K">Kalman</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="P">P.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Jewish Theological Seminary of America</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields as well as the \texttt{indextitle} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>7</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:series>Moreshet: Studies in {Jewish} History, Literature and Thought</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Possibility of Conjunction</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect by {Ibn Rushd} with the Commentary of {Moses Narboni}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1982</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="averroes/hannes" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="annotator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hannes</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="L">Ludwig</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Averroes</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hannes</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="L">Ludwig</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hannes</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="L">Ludwig</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Halle an der Saale</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>C.~A. Kaemmerer</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>An annotated edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor}, \texttt{translator}, and \texttt{annotator} fields. Also note the \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Über die Möglichkeit der Conjunktion</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Über die Möglichkeit der Conjunktion</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Des Averroës Abhandlung: \mkbibquote{Über die Möglichkeit der Conjunktion} oder \mkbibquote{Über den materiellen Intellekt}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1892</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="averroes/hercz" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Averroes</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hercz</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hercz</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Berlin</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>S.~Hermann</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields as well as the \texttt{indextitle} and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Drei Abhandlungen über die Conjunction</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Drei Abhandlungen</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen übersetzt von Samuel Ibn Tibbon</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Drei Abhandlungen über die Conjunction des separaten Intellects mit dem Menschen</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1869</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="cicero" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="afterword">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="T">Thraede</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="K">Klaus</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Cicero</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Marcus</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="T">Tullius</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B-S">Blank-Sangmeister</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="U">Ursula</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B-S">Blank-Sangmeister</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="U">Ursula</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:language>
+ <bltx:item>langlatin</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>langgerman</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:language>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Stuttgart</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Reclam</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A bilingual edition of Cicero's \emph{De natura deorum}, with a German translation. Note the format of the \texttt{language} field in the database file, the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields, and the \texttt{afterword} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>De natura deorum</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>De natura deorum</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>De natura deorum. Über das Wesen der Götter</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1995</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="coleridge" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Coleridge</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="S">Samuel</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="T">Taylor</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Coburn</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="K">Kathleen</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="E">Engell</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">James</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Bate</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">W.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">Jackson</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>London</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Routledge {and} Kegan Paul</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>One (partial) volume of a multivolume book. This is a \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{volume} and a \texttt{part} field which explicitly refers to the second (physical) part of the seventh (logical) volume. Also note the \texttt{series} and \texttt{number} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Biographia literaria</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:maintitle>The collected works of {Samuel Taylor Coleridge}</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:number>75</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:part>2</bltx:part>
+ <bltx:series>Bollingen Series</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Biographia literaria</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Biographia literaria, or {Biographical} sketches of my literary life and opinions</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>7</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>1983</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="companion" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Goossens</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Michel</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Mittelbach</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Frank</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Samarin</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Alexander</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A book with three authors. Note the formatting of the author list. By default, only the first name is reversed in the bibliography</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>1</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:indextitle>LaTeX Companion, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:pagetotal>528</bltx:pagetotal>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>LaTeX Companion</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>LaTeX Companion</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The {LaTeX} Companion</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1994</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="cotton" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Cotton</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="F">Frank</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">Albert</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Wilkinson</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="G">Geoffrey</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Murillio</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="C">Carlos</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">A.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Bochmann</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Manfred</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Chichester</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Wiley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry with \arabic{author} authors and an \texttt{edition} field. By default, long \texttt{author} and \texttt{editor} lists are automatically truncated. This is configurable</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>6</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Advanced inorganic chemistry</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1999</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="gerhardt" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gerhardt</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Michael</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Durham</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>London</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Duke University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{location} field as well as the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Federal Appointments Process, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Federal Appointments Process</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Federal Appointments Process</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>A Constitutional and Historical Analysis</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Federal Appointments Process</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2000</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="gonzalez" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gonzalez</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="R">Ray</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Tucson</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>The University of Arizona Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A collection of short stories. This is a \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields in the database file. There's also an \texttt{isbn} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Ghost of {John Wayne} and Other Stories, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:isbn>0-816-52066-6</bltx:isbn>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Ghost of {John Wayne}</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Ghost of John Wayne and Other Stories</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Ghost of {John Wayne} and Other Stories</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2001</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="hammond" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hammond</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="C">Christopher</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Oxford</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>International Union of Crystallography</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Oxford University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields as well as the format of the \texttt{publisher} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Basics of crystallography and diffraction, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Crystallography and diffraction</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Basics of crystallography and diffraction</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The basics of crystallography and diffraction</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1997</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="iliad" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Homer</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="introduction">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Latacz</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">Joachim</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Schadewaldt</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="W">Wolfgang</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Düsseldorf</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Zürich</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Artemis \&amp; Winkler</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A German translation of the \emph{Iliad}. Note the \texttt{translator} and \texttt{introduction} fields and the format of the \texttt{location} field in the database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>3</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Ilias, Die</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Ilias</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Ilias</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Die Ilias</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2004</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="knuth:ct" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Knuth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Donald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A five-volume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{book} entry, note the \texttt{volumes} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1984-0</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>Computers \&amp; Typesetting</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volumes>5</bltx:volumes>
+ <bltx:date>
+ <bltx:start>1984</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>1986</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="knuth:ct:a" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Knuth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Donald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>The first volume of a five-volume book. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this volume to be listed after the entry referring to the entire five-volume set. Also note the \texttt{indextitle} and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields. Indexing packages that don't generate robust index entries require some control sequences to be protected from expansion</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>The TeXbook</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>\protect\TeX book, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Computers \&amp; Typesetting</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>\TeX book</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting A</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1984-1</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>The {\TeX} book</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>A</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>1984</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="knuth:ct:b" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Knuth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Donald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>The second volume of a five-volume book. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. Also note the \texttt{indexsorttitle} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>TeX: The Program</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Computers \&amp; Typesetting</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>\TeX</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting B</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1986-1</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>\TeX: The Program</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>B</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>1986</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="knuth:ct:c" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Knuth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Donald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>The third volume of a five-volume book. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields as well as the \texttt{indextitle} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>METAFONTbook, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Computers \&amp; Typesetting</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>METAFONTbook</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting C</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1986-2</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>The {METAFONTbook}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>C</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>1986</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="knuth:ct:d" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Knuth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Donald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>The fourth volume of a five-volume book. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Computers \&amp; Typesetting</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>METAFONT</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting D</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1986-3</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>METAFONT: The Program</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>D</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>1986</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="knuth:ct:e" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Knuth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Donald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>The fifth volume of a five-volume book. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Computers \&amp; Typesetting</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting E</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1986-4</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>{Computer Modern} Typefaces</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>E</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>1986</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="knuth:ct:related" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Knuth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Donald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Reading, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Addison-Wesley</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A five-volume book cited as a whole and related to its individual volumes. Note the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedtype} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:relatedtype>multivolume</bltx:relatedtype>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Computers &amp; Typesetting</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1984-0</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>Computers \&amp; Typesetting</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volumes>5</bltx:volumes>
+ <bltx:date>
+ <bltx:start>1984</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>1986</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="kullback" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kullback</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Solomon</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>John Wiley \&amp; Sons</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Information Theory and Statistics</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1959</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="kullback:reprint" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kullback</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Solomon</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:origpublisher>
+ <bltx:item>John Wiley \&amp; Sons</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:origpublisher>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Dover Publications</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A reprint of the \texttt{kullback} entry. Note the format of \texttt{origyear} and \texttt{origpublisher}. These fields are not used by the standard bibliography styles</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Information Theory and Statistics</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1997</bltx:date>
+ <bltx:date type="orig">1959</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="kullback:related" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kullback</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Solomon</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Dover Publications</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A reprint of the \texttt{kullback} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedtype} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:relatedtype>origpubin</bltx:relatedtype>
+ <bltx:title>Information Theory and Statistics</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1997</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="malinowski" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Malinowski</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="B">Bronis{ł}aw</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>London</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Routledge {and} Kegan Paul</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{edition} fields as well as the \texttt{subtitle} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>8</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Argonauts</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>An account of native enterprise and adventure in the Archipelagoes of {Melanesian New Guinea}</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Argonauts of the {Western Pacific}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1972</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="maron" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Maron</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Monika</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Goldstein</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="B">Brigitte</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Lincoln</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>University of Nebraska Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>An English translation of a German novel with a French title. In other words: a \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{translator} field. Note the \texttt{origlanguage} field which is concatenated with the \texttt{translator}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:origlanguage>german</bltx:origlanguage>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Animal Triste</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Animal Triste</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2000</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="massa" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Massa</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="W">Werner</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Berlin</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Spinger</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{edition} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>2</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Crystal structure determination</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2004</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="moore" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Moore</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">Gordon</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Electronics</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>8</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Cramming more components onto integrated circuits</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>38</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>114</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>117</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1965</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="moore:related" entrytype="article">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Moore</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">Gordon</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>A reprint of Moore's law. Note the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedtype} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:journaltitle>Proceedings of the {IEEE}</bltx:journaltitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>1</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:relatedtype>reprintfrom</bltx:relatedtype>
+ <bltx:title>Cramming more components onto integrated circuits</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>86</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>82</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>85</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1998</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="nietzsche:ksa" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nietzsche</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Friedrich</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Colli</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="G">Giorgio</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Montinari</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Mazzino</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>München</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Berlin</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Walter de Gruyter</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>The critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This is a \texttt{book} entry referring to a 15-volume work as a whole. Note the \texttt{volumes} field and the format of the \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{location} fields in the database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields which are used to fine-tune the sorting order of the bibliography. We want this item listed first in the bibliography</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>2</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Samtliche Werke</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Werke-00-000</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1988-0</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Kritische Studienausgabe</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Sämtliche Werke</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volumes>15</bltx:volumes>
+ <bltx:date>1988</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="nietzsche:ksa1" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nietzsche</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Friedrich</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="bookauthor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nietzsche</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Friedrich</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Colli</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="G">Giorgio</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Montinari</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Mazzino</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>München</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Berlin</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Walter de Gruyter</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A single volume from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This \texttt{book} entry explicitly refers to the first volume only. Note the \texttt{title} and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to be listed after the entry referring to the entire edition</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>2</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Samtliche Werke I</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Sämtliche Werke I</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:mainsubtitle>Kritische Studienausgabe</bltx:mainsubtitle>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Sämtliche Werke</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Sämtliche Werke I</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Werke-01-000</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1988-1</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:title>Die Geburt der Tragödie. Unzeitgemä{ß}e Betrachtungen I--IV. Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>1</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>1988</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="nussbaum" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nussbaum</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Martha</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Princeton</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Princeton University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields and the markup of the quotes in the database file</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Aristotle's De Motu Animalium</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Aristotle's De Motu Animalium</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Aristotle's \mkbibquote{De Motu Animalium}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1978</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="piccato" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="P">Piccato</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="P">Pablo</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Durham</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>London</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Duke University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{location} field in the database file</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>City of Suspects</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Crime in {Mexico City}, 1900--1931</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>City of Suspects</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2001</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="vangennep" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:options>useprefix</bltx:options>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gennep</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Arnold</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="prefix" initial="v">van</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Paris</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Nourry</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry. Note the format of the printed name and compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as \texttt{brandt} and \texttt{geer}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Rites de passage, Les</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>french</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Rites de passage</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Rites de passage</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Les rites de passage</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1909</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="vangennep:trans" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:options>useprefix</bltx:options>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gennep</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Arnold</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="prefix" initial="v">van</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="V">Vizedom</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Monika</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="B">B.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Caffee</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">Gabrielle</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="L">L.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:language>
+ <bltx:item>english</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:language>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>University of Chicago Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A translation of the \texttt{vangennep} entry. Note the \texttt{translator} and \texttt{origlanguage} fields. Compare with the \texttt{vangennep:related} entry.</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Rites of Passage, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:origlanguage>french</bltx:origlanguage>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Rites of Passage</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Rites of Passage</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Rites of Passage</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1960</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="vangennep:related" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:options>useprefix</bltx:options>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gennep</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Arnold</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="prefix" initial="v">van</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Paris</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Nourry</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A variant of the \texttt{vangennep} entry related to its translation. Note the format of the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedtype} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Rites de passage, Les</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>french</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:relatedtype>bytranslator</bltx:relatedtype>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Rites de passage</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Rites de passage</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Les rites de passage</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1909</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="vizedom:related" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:options>usetranslator</bltx:options>
+ <bltx:names type="translator">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="V">Vizedom</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Monika</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="B">B.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Caffee</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">Gabrielle</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="L">L.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:language>
+ <bltx:item>english</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:language>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>University of Chicago Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A translated work from \texttt{vangennep}. Note the format of the \texttt{related} and \texttt{relatedtype} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Rites of Passage, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:relatedtype>translationof</bltx:relatedtype>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Rites of Passage</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Rites of Passage</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Rites of Passage</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1960</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="vazques-de-parga" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="V">Vázques{</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>de</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>}Parga</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="L">Luis</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Lacarra</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">José</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">María</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="U">Uría</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">Ríu</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">Juan</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Pamplona</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Iberdrola</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A multivolume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{book} entry with \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>spanish</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:note>Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49</bltx:note>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Peregrinaciones</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volumes>3</bltx:volumes>
+ <bltx:date>1993</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="wilde" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Wilde</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="O">Oscar</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Leonard Smithers {and} Company</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} with \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype} fields.</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:eprint>4HIWAAAAYAAJ</bltx:eprint>
+ <bltx:eprinttype>googlebooks</bltx:eprinttype>
+ <bltx:series>English and {American} drama of the Nineteenth Century</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:title>The Importance of Being Earnest: A Trivial Comedy for Serious People</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1899</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="worman" entrytype="book">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Worman</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="N">Nancy</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Austin</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>University of Texas Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Cast of Character, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Cast of Character</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Cast of Character</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Style in {Greek} Literature</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Cast of Character</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2002</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="britannica" entrytype="collection">
+ <bltx:options>useeditor=false</bltx:options>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="P">Preece</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">Warren</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Chicago, Ill.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Encyclop{æ}dia Britannica</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{collection} entry for an encyclopedia. Note the \texttt{useeditor} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as the \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want this entry to be cited and alphabetized by title even though there is an editor. In addition to that, we want the title to be alphabetized under \enquote*{E} rather than \enquote*{T}. Also note the \texttt{label} field which is provided for author-year citation styles</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>15</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:indextitle>{Encyclop{æ}dia Britannica}, The {New}</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:label>EB</bltx:label>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>{Encyclop{æ}dia Britannica}</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Encyclop{æ}dia Britannica</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The {New Encyclop{æ}dia Britannica}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volumes>32</bltx:volumes>
+ <bltx:date>2003</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="gaonkar" entrytype="collection">
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gaonkar</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Dilip</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="P">Parameshwar</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Durham</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>London</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Duke University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{collection} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{location} field in the database file as well as the \texttt{isbn} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:isbn>0-822-32714-7</bltx:isbn>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Alternative Modernities</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2001</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="gaonkar:in" entrytype="incollection">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gaonkar</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Dilip</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="P">Parameshwar</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Gaonkar</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Dilip</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="P">Parameshwar</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Durham</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>London</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Duke University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Alternative Modernities</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:isbn>0-822-32714-7</bltx:isbn>
+ <bltx:title>On Alternative Modernities</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>1</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>23</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>2001</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="jaffe" entrytype="collection">
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="J">Jaffé</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="P">Philipp</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editora">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Loewenfeld</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Samuel</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kaltenbrunner</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Ferdinand</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="E">Ewald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="P">Paul</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Leipzig</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:annotation>A \texttt{collection} entry with \texttt{edition} and \texttt{volumes} fields. Note the \texttt{editora} and \texttt{editoratype} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>2</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:editoratype>redactor</bltx:editoratype>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Regesta Pontificum Romanorum</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>latin</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Regesta Pontificum Romanorum</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum natum \textsc{mcxcviii}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volumes>2</bltx:volumes>
+ <bltx:date>
+ <bltx:start>1885</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>1888</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="westfahl:frontier" entrytype="collection">
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Westfahl</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="G">Gary</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Westport, Conn.</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>London</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Greenwood</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{collection} entry. Note the format of the \texttt{location} field as well as the \texttt{subtitle} and \texttt{booksubtitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booksubtitle>The Frontier Theme in Science Fiction</bltx:booksubtitle>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Space and Beyond</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:subtitle>The Frontier Theme in Science Fiction</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Space and Beyond</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2000</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="kant:kpv" entrytype="inbook">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kant</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="I">Immanuel</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="bookauthor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kant</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="I">Immanuel</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Berlin</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Walter de Gruyter</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Practical Reason} only, not to the entire fifth volume. Note the \texttt{author} and \texttt{bookauthor} fields in the database file. By default, the \texttt{bookauthor} is omitted if the values of the \texttt{author} and \texttt{bookauthor} fields are identical</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorthand>KpV</bltx:shorthand>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Kritik der praktischen Vernunft</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Kritik der praktischen Vernunft</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>5</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>1</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>163</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1968</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="kant:ku" entrytype="inbook">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kant</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="I">Immanuel</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="bookauthor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kant</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="I">Immanuel</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Berlin</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Walter de Gruyter</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Judgment} only, not to the entire fifth volume</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorthand>KU</bltx:shorthand>
+ <bltx:title>Kritik der Urtheilskraft</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>5</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>165</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>485</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1968</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="nietzsche:historie" entrytype="inbook">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nietzsche</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Friedrich</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="bookauthor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nietzsche</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Friedrich</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Colli</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="G">Giorgio</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Montinari</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Mazzino</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>München</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Berlin</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>New York</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>Walter de Gruyter</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A single essay from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This \texttt{inbook} entry explicitly refers to an essay found in the first volume. Note the \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}, and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to be listed after the entry referring to the entire first volume</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Die Geburt der Tragödie. Unzeitgemä{ß}e Betrachtungen I--IV. Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie für das Leben</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:mainsubtitle>Kritische Studienausgabe</bltx:mainsubtitle>
+ <bltx:maintitle>Sämtliche Werke</bltx:maintitle>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Werke-01-243</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:sortyear>1988-2</bltx:sortyear>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie für das Leben</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Unzeitgemässe Betrachtungen. Zweites Stück</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>1</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>243</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>334</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1988</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="brandt" entrytype="incollection">
+ <bltx:options>useprefix=false</bltx:options>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Brandt</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Ahasver</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="prefix" initial="v">von</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hoffmann</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="E">Erich</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Seibt</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Ferdinand</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Stuttgart</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Klett-Cotta</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}. Note the format of the printed name and compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as \texttt{vangennep}. Also note the \texttt{indextitle, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Europa im Hoch- und Spätmittelalter</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Nordischen Länder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448, Die</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:number>2</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:series>Handbuch der europäischen Geschichte</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Die nordischen Länder</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Die nordischen Länder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>884</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>917</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1987</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="hyman" entrytype="incollection">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="H">Hyman</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Arthur</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="O">O'Meara</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Dominic</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">J.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Washington, D.C.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>The Catholic University of America Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and \texttt{number} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Studies in {Aristotle}</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Aristotle's Theory of the Intellect</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>9</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:series>Studies in Philosophy and the History of Philosophy</bltx:series>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Aristotle's Theory of the Intellect</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>Aristotle's Theory of the Intellect and its Interpretation by {Averroes}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>161</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>191</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1981</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="pines" entrytype="incollection">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="P">Pines</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Shlomo</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="T">Twersky</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="I">Isadore</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Cambridge, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Harvard University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>A typical \texttt{incollection} entry. Note the \texttt{indextitle} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Studies in Medieval {Jewish} History and Literature</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Limitations of Human Knowledge According to {Al-Farabi}, {ibn Bajja}, and {Maimonides}, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Limitations of Human Knowledge</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>The Limitations of Human Knowledge According to {Al-Farabi}, {ibn Bajja}, and {Maimonides}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>82</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>109</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1979</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="moraux" entrytype="inproceedings">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Moraux</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="P">Paul</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Lloyd</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">G.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">R.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="O">Owen</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="G">G.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="L">L.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Cambridge</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Cambridge University Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a typical \texttt{inproceedings} entry. Note the \texttt{booksubtitle}, \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields. Also note the \texttt{eventdate} field.</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Aristotle on Mind and the Senses</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:booktitleaddon>Proceedings of the Seventh Symposium Aristotelicum</bltx:booktitleaddon>
+ <bltx:indexsorttitle>De Anima dans la tradition grecque</bltx:indexsorttitle>
+ <bltx:indextitle>\emph{De Anima} dans la tradition grècque, Le</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>french</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>\emph{De Anima} dans la tradition grècque</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>Quelques aspects de l'interpretation du traité, de Theophraste à Themistius</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Le \emph{De Anima} dans la tradition grècque</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>281</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>324</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1979</bltx:date>
+ <bltx:date type="event">1975</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="salam" entrytype="inproceedings">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Salam</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Abdus</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="editor">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Svartholm</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="N">Nils</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Stockholm</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>Almquist \&amp; Wiksell</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:booksubtitle>Relativistic groups and analyticity</bltx:booksubtitle>
+ <bltx:booktitle>Elementary particle theory</bltx:booktitle>
+ <bltx:booktitleaddon>Proceedings of the {Eighth Nobel Symposium}</bltx:booktitleaddon>
+ <bltx:title>Weak and Electromagnetic Interactions</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:venue>Aspenäsgarden, Lerum</bltx:venue>
+ <bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:list>
+ <bltx:item>
+ <bltx:start>367</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>377</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:item>
+ </bltx:list>
+ </bltx:pages>
+ <bltx:date>1968</bltx:date>
+ <bltx:date type="event">
+ <bltx:start>1968-05-19</bltx:start>
+ <bltx:end>1968-05-25</bltx:end>
+ </bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="cms" entrytype="manual">
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Chicago, Ill.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:item>University of Chicago Press</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:publisher>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{manual} entry without an \texttt{author} or \texttt{editor}. Note the \texttt{label} field in the database file which is provided for author-year citation styles. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields. By default, all entries without an \texttt{author} or \texttt{editor} are alphabetized by \texttt{title} but we want this entry to be alphabetized under \enquote*{C} rather than \enquote*{T}. There's also an \texttt{isbn} field</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:edition>15</bltx:edition>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Chicago Manual of Style, The</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:isbn>0-226-10403-6</bltx:isbn>
+ <bltx:label>CMS</bltx:label>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:shorttitle>Chicago Manual of Style</bltx:shorttitle>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Chicago Manual of Style</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>The Essential Guide for Writers, Editors, and Publishers</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>The {Chicago} Manual of Style</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>2003</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="baez/online" entrytype="online">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Baez</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">John</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="C">C.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Lauda</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">Aaron</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">D.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{online} reference from arXiv. Note the \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype} fields. Compare \texttt{baez\slash article} which is the same item given as an \texttt{article} entry with eprint information</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:eprint>math/0307200v3</bltx:eprint>
+ <bltx:eprinttype>arxiv</bltx:eprinttype>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Higher-Dimensional Algebra {V}: 2-Groups</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:version>3</bltx:version>
+ <bltx:date>2004-10-27</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="ctan" entrytype="online">
+ <bltx:annotation>This is an \texttt{online} entry. The \textsc{url}, which is given in the \texttt{url} field, is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled. Note the format of the \texttt{urldate} field (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file. Also note the \texttt{label} field which may be used as a fallback by citation styles which need an \texttt{author} and\slash or a \texttt{year}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:label>CTAN</bltx:label>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:subtitle>The {Comprehensive TeX Archive Network}</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>CTAN</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:url>http://www.ctan.org</bltx:url>
+ <bltx:date>2006</bltx:date>
+ <bltx:date type="url">2006-10-01</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="itzhaki" entrytype="online">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="I">Itzhaki</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="N">Nissan</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:abstract>We discuss the limitations of 't Hooft's proposal for the black hole S-matrix. We find that the validity of the S-matrix implies violation of the semi-classical approximation at scales large compared to the Planck scale. We also show that the effect of the centrifugal barrier on the S-matrix is crucial even for large transverse distances.</bltx:abstract>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{online} reference from arXiv. Note the \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype} fields. Also note that the arXiv reference is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:eprint>hep-th/9603067</bltx:eprint>
+ <bltx:eprinttype>arxiv</bltx:eprinttype>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Some remarks on {'t Hooft's} {S}-matrix for black holes</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:version>1</bltx:version>
+ <bltx:date>1996-03-11</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="markey" entrytype="online">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Markey</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="N">Nicolas</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>An \texttt{online} entry for a tutorial. Note the format of the \texttt{date} field (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Tame the Beast</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:subtitle>The {B} to {X} of {BibTeX}</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Tame the {BeaST}</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:url>http://mirror.ctan.org/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf</bltx:url>
+ <bltx:version>1.3</bltx:version>
+ <bltx:date>2005-10-16</bltx:date>
+ <bltx:date type="url">2006-10-01</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="wassenberg" entrytype="online">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="W">Wassenberg</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">Jan</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Sanders</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="P">Peter</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:abstract>Sorting algorithms are the deciding factor for the performance of common operations such as removal of duplicates or database sort-merge joins. This work focuses on 32-bit integer keys, optionally paired with a 32-bit value. We present a fast radix sorting algorithm that builds upon a microarchitecture-aware variant of counting sort</bltx:abstract>
+ <bltx:annotation>A recent \texttt{online} reference from arXiv using the new (April 2007 onward) identifier format. Note the \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{eprinttype}, and \texttt{eprintclass} fields. Also note that the arXiv reference is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} support has been enabled</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:eprint>1008.2849v1</bltx:eprint>
+ <bltx:eprintclass>cs.DS</bltx:eprintclass>
+ <bltx:eprinttype>arxiv</bltx:eprinttype>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>Faster Radix Sort via Virtual Memory and Write-Combining</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:version>1</bltx:version>
+ <bltx:date>2010-08-17</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="almendro" entrytype="patent">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="A">Almendro</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="J">José</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="L">L.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Martín</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">Jacinto</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Sánchez</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Alberto</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nozal</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Fernando</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>countryfr</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>countryuk</bltx:item>
+ <bltx:item>countryde</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{patent} entry with a \texttt{location} field. The number is given in the \texttt{number} field. Note the format of the \texttt{location} field in the database file. Compare \texttt{laufenberg}, \texttt{sorace}, and \texttt{kowalik}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:number>EU-29702195U</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Elektromagnetisches Signalhorn</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:date>1998</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="kowalik" entrytype="patent">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="K">Kowalik</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">F.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="I">Isard</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">M.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{patent} entry for a French patent request with a full date. The number is given in the \texttt{number} field. Note the format of the \texttt{type} and \texttt{date} fields in the database file. Compare \texttt{almendro}, \texttt{laufenberg}, and \texttt{sorace}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Estimateur d'un défaut de fonctionnement</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>french</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:number>9500261</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Estimateur d'un défaut de fonctionnement d'un modulateur en quadrature et étage de modulation l'utilisant</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:type>patreqfr</bltx:type>
+ <bltx:date>1995-01-11</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="laufenberg" entrytype="patent">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Laufenberg</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="X">Xaver</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="E">Eynius</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="D">Dominique</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Suelzle</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="H">Helmut</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="U">Usbeck</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="S">Stephan</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Spaeth</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Matthias</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N-H">Neuser-Hoffmann</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Miriam</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="M">Myrzik</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="C">Christian</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Schmid</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="M">Manfred</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="N">Nietfeld</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="F">Franz</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="T">Thiel</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="A">Alexander</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="B">Braun</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="H">Harald</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="E">Ebner</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="N">Norbert</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="holder">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">Robert</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>Bosch</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>GmbH</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="D">Daimler</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>Chrysler</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>AG</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="B">Bayerische</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>Motoren</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>Werke</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>AG</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:abstract>The invention relates to an electric device comprising a generator, in particular for use in the vehicle electric system of a motor vehicle and a controller for controlling the generator voltage. The device is equipped with a control zone, in which the voltage is controlled and zones, in which the torque is controlled. The invention also relates to methods for operating a device of this type.</bltx:abstract>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{patent} entry with a \texttt{holder} field. Note the format of the \texttt{type} and \texttt{location} fields in the database file. Compare \texttt{almendro}, \texttt{sorace}, and \texttt{kowalik}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:file>http://v3.espacenet.com/textdoc?IDX=EP1700367</bltx:file>
+ <bltx:langid>german</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:number>1700367</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Elektrische Einrichtung und Betriebsverfahren</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:type>patenteu</bltx:type>
+ <bltx:date>2006-09-13</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="sorace" entrytype="patent">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="S">Sorace</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="R">Ronald</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="E">E.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="R">Reinhardt</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="V">Victor</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="S">S.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="V">Vaughn</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="S">Steven</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="A">A.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:names type="holder">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="H">Hughes</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>Aircraft</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart>Company</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{patent} entry with a \texttt{holder} field. Note the format of the \texttt{type} and \texttt{date} fields in the database file. Compare \texttt{almendro}, \texttt{laufenberg}, and \texttt{kowalik}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>5668842</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>High-Speed Digital-to-{RF} Converter</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:type>patentus</bltx:type>
+ <bltx:date>1997-09-16</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="jcg" entrytype="periodical">
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{periodical} entry with an \texttt{issn} field.</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:issn>0097-8493</bltx:issn>
+ <bltx:issuetitle>Semantic {3D} Media and Content</bltx:issuetitle>
+ <bltx:number>4</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:title>Computers and Graphics</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:volume>35</bltx:volume>
+ <bltx:date>2011</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="chiu" entrytype="report">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Chiu</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">Willy</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">W.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="C">Chow</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="W">We</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="M">Min</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:item>IBM</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{report} entry for a research report. Note the format of the \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key. The number of the report is given in the \texttt{number} field. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Hybrid Hierarchical Model, A</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>RC-6947</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>Hybrid Hierarchical Model of a Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS) Operating System</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>A Hybrid Hierarchical Model of a {Multiple Virtual Storage} ({MVS}) Operating System</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:type>resreport</bltx:type>
+ <bltx:date>1978</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="padhye" entrytype="report">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="P">Padhye</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="J">Jitendra</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="F">Firoiu</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="V">Victor</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="T">Towsley</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="D">Don</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:item>University of Massachusetts</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Amherst, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:abstract>The steady state performance of a bulk transfer TCP flow (i.e. a flow with a large amount of data to send, such as FTP transfers) may be characterized by three quantities. The first is the send rate, which is the amount of data sent by the sender in unit time. The second is the throughput, which is the amount of data received by the receiver in unit time. Note that the throughput will always be less than or equal to the send rate due to losses. Finally, the number of non-duplicate packets received by the receiver in unit time gives us the goodput of the connection. The goodput is always less than or equal to the throughput, since the receiver may receive two copies of the same packet due to retransmissions by the sender. In a previous paper, we presented a simple model for predicting the steady state send rate of a bulk transfer TCP flow as a function of loss rate and round trip time. In this paper, we extend that work in two ways. First, we analyze the performance of bulk transfer TCP flows using more precise, stochastic analysis. Second, we build upon the previous analysis to provide both an approximate formula as well as a more accurate stochastic model for the steady state throughput of a bulk transfer TCP flow.</bltx:abstract>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a \texttt{report} entry for a technical report. Note the format of the \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key. The number of the report is given in the \texttt{number} field. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:file>ftp://gaia.cs.umass.edu/pub/Padhey99-markov.ps</bltx:file>
+ <bltx:indextitle>Stochastic Model of {TCP Reno} Congestion Avoidance and Control, A</bltx:indextitle>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:number>99-02</bltx:number>
+ <bltx:sorttitle>A Stochastic Model of TCP Reno Congestion Avoidance and Control</bltx:sorttitle>
+ <bltx:title>A Stochastic Model of {TCP Reno} Congestion Avoidance and Control</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:type>techreport</bltx:type>
+ <bltx:date>1999</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="geer" entrytype="thesis">
+ <bltx:options>useprefix=false</bltx:options>
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="G">Geer</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given" initial="I">Ingrid</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="prefix" initial="d">de</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:item>Uppsala Universitet</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Uppsala</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for a PhD thesis. Note the \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key. Also note the format of the printed name and compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as \texttt{vangennep}</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=british</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:subtitle>The {Orkney Earldom} of the Twelfth Century. {A} Musicological Study</bltx:subtitle>
+ <bltx:title>Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:type>phdthesis</bltx:type>
+ <bltx:date>1985</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+ <bltx:entry id="loh" entrytype="thesis">
+ <bltx:names type="author">
+ <bltx:name>
+ <bltx:namepart type="family" initial="L">Loh</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart type="given">
+ <bltx:namepart initial="N">Nin</bltx:namepart>
+ <bltx:namepart initial="C">C.</bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:namepart>
+ </bltx:name>
+ </bltx:names>
+ <bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:item>Massachusetts Institute of Technology</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:institution>
+ <bltx:location>
+ <bltx:item>Cambridge, Mass.</bltx:item>
+ </bltx:location>
+ <bltx:annotation>This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for an MA thesis. Note the \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key</bltx:annotation>
+ <bltx:langid>english</bltx:langid>
+ <bltx:langidopts>variant=american</bltx:langidopts>
+ <bltx:title>High-Resolution Micromachined Interferometric Accelerometer</bltx:title>
+ <bltx:type>mathesis</bltx:type>
+ <bltx:date>1992</bltx:date>
+ </bltx:entry>
+</bltx:entries>